Validation by analysis of complex safety systems

The validation of a device by analysis, especially for complex safety systems can be done on a 5 step analysis

First step : functional analysis

The purpose of the functional analysis is to identify the functions to be fulfilled by the system. It is also intended to explain the system's operation by establishing a link between the hardware and software functions. This stage is the assessment's input point. It needs to be sufficiently accurate to identify failures with an impact on the system's safety.

Several functional analysis procedures may be used to explain the operation of automatic systems :

  • functional block diagram procedure,
  • SADT procedure,
  • SA_RT procedure,
  • etc.

Second step : failure rate prediction

The purpose of the failure rate prediction is not to assess the system's reliability. Calculations are only conducted for the components with a risk in relation to safety, in order to quantify the dangerous failure rate. To that end, a calculation makes it possible to assess an equivalent failure rate of the system. This calculation comprises : component failure rates, component stress, climatic environment, component quality, etc.

The failure rate prediction allows us to quantify the FMECA (Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis - See 3rd stage) and to identify the contribution of the various failure modes to the system's unsafe situation.

Failure rate calculations are grounded on databases that supply a basic failure rate for each type of component. This basic failure rate is modulated according to corrective factors according to the environment and component.

Third step  : failure modes effects and criticality analysis (FMECA)

After identifying the components fulfilling the functions (hardware and software), identified by the functional analysis, the failure modes and their effects on the system's operation must be analysed in the scope of this study. The purpose of this stage is to analyse the failures to identify “ dangerous ” failure modes, and to quantify the probability of failure occurrence.

The Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis (FMECA) is conducted at electronic component detail level for the safety device. The purpose of this analysis is :

  •  to identify the “ dangerous ” failure modes to assess the “ dangerous ” failure rates leading to the hazardous event, while assessing a coverage rate for the various tests;
  • to identify the possible preventive maintenance provisions to be integrated to guarantee a safety integrity level in compliance with the defined goals.

Failures are classified in 4 classes  :

  • dangerous detected failures whose effects are on safety and availability (λDD),
  • dangerous un-detected failures whose effects are only on safety (λDU),
  • non-dangerous detected failures whose effects are only on availability (λSD),
  • non-dangerous and undetected failures whose effects are only on availability (λSU).

λDU λ Dangerous, Undetected ; λS = λ  Safe).

λS = Safe failure : i.e. a failure that results in system fallback (safe situation for safety).

λDU = Unsafe failure : failure whose consequence leads to a dangerous state from the standpoint of safety.

The following diagram (Figure A4) gives further details of this notion of distribution of failures according to their effect. The objective of this stage is to define the unsafe failure modes. References (28) and (29) are examples of sources of data for the failure mode distribution for various components.

 

Figure 1  : Failure distribution according to their effect

Fourth step : modelling of the system's various states

There are three system types according to the various encountered systems :

[1]  Failsafe systems

[2]  Non-redundant systems

[3]  Redundant systems

The system's dangerous failure probability calculation is different according to the various types of system.

Failsafe systems

Failsafe systems are systems in which the failure modes of all components of the system lead to a « safe state » in relation to safety. For these systems, there is no use in calculating the dangerous failure probability as the λDU dangerous failure rate does not exist

Non-redundant systems

Non-redundant systems are “ simple ” systems in which the safety function can be lost in the event of failure. Two states are possible : safe state or dangerous state. The calculation of the dangerous failure probability for the systems comes down to a specific reliability calculation depending on the dangerous failure rate (λDU - identified in FMECA) and with the same duration as the preventive maintenance operations.

Redundant systems

In the event of redundant systems, the safety function can be lost due to combinations of failures depending on the logic implemented within the safety system. There are several safety integrity level quantitative assessment procedures for such systems. The main drawback of the more traditional procedures such as the analysis by fault tree system, or the analysis by reliability block diagram, is that they do not always take into account the time aspect, test periodicity, coverage levels, as well as the repair rate.

The various failure and operating states can be modelled with MARKOV graphs, by integrating the time aspect of the preventive maintenance tests, the autotests as well as the coverage rate, as the electronic systems are subject to a failure law of exponential form with a constant failure rate.

A1.6.4.1         Influence of testability on safety

For safety purposes, the state of the resources must be known on a permanent basis to see if hidden (or dormant or latent) failures liable to mask the safety function exist. These dormant failures are only detected during periodic tests voluntarily conducted by the user.

A test policy is useless for failsafe systems as each failure leads to a “ safe ” position in relation to safety.

On the contrary, for systems that are neither failsafe nor autotestable and on which dangerous failures exist, a test policy to detect the “ dangerous failures ” (with a risk for safety) is required.

These tests must be conducted according to a periodicity grounded on the characteristics of the various elements constituting the system. Dangerous failures can be detected in two ways :

  • Either by the test and autotests system of the safety system for detectable failures (lDD),
  • Or during verification operations for non-detectable failures (lDU).

The PLC's reliability level is not increased by testability. It just makes it possible to ensure that resources are still available  : to read the inputs and control the outputs, on the one hand, and to make sure that the processing modules are still functional, on the other hand. Only dangerous failure detection comes into play. It is possible to detect and switch to safe position in the event of failure, thanks to this test, and therefore to better guarantee safety. The following diagram shows the impact of testability on safety, and the impact of a state changeover test policy conducted every 24 hours or every 6 months on safety.

Figure 2  : Testability impact on safety

Graph establishment

IEC 61508 (18) and reference (30) stipulate the procedure and various stages of system modelling. State graphs are represented below for each safety function. Modelling is achieved with “ states ” that the system is liable to enter. There are 3 states in  most cases :

State 2            represented as follows : (2)

This state corresponds to the modelling of redundancy. In this state, all implemented resources are present and operate in a nominal manner.

State 1            represented as follows : (1)

This state corresponds to the modelling of redundancy downgraded by the dangerous failure of a hardware element on one of two channels. In this state, all implemented resources are not present. It is an undetected dangerous failure state. Safety is still guaranteed.

State 0            represented as follows : (0)

This state corresponds to the modelling of the loss of redundancy due to the dangerous failure of several hardware elements from the channels. In this state, safety is no longer guaranteed and in the event that the safety function is called upon, the system will not go to safe position.

The “ P ” probability of being in “ 0 ” state is designated by PFD(t) in the IEC 61508 standard. The meaning of PFD(t) value is the value defined in the previous paragraph.

Assumptions

MARKOV graph modelling for the studied systems by INERIS was grounded on the following assumptions :

[1]  failure rates (l) and repair rates (m) are assumed constant to make it possible to model and calculate the safety level with MARKOV graphs.

[2]  The mission time (TI) corresponds to the intervals between the OFF LINE periodic test times. All test rates concerning the aptitude to detect state changeovers (mPTi) are stated for each arc of each graph.

[3]  Inputs and outputs do not go to the safe state if the power supply is cut off.

[4]  The common failure modes, and the systematic errors are assumed equal to those defined in reference (28). lD common mode failures or faults have the specificity of affecting all lines at the same time. The selected values are those defined in the same document.

System modelling example

Two active redundancy systems are modelled as follows

Figure 3  : Redundant system state modelling

 

This graph is equivalent to the following graph :

Figure 4  : Redundant system state reduced modelling

The “ P ” probability of being in a “ 0 ” state therefore depends on a failure rate that in turn depends on time T : P = L(t) x T.

This example shows that the more time T increases and the more the probability of being at “ 0 ” state increases.

 

English

BS EN 13980 2002 standard

EN 13980 December 2002 : Potentially explosive atmospheres - Application of quality systems

This standard specifies information as well as particular requirements related to the establishment and the maintenance of a quality system of a manufacturer of products intended to be used in explosive atmospheres. It is supposed to serve as a basis for the initial assessment as well as subsequent visits paid to the system in the frame the quality system assessment related to manufacturers as executed by bodies notified for the EU Directive 94/9/CE.

BS EN 13980: 2002 replaces an  ExNB (Ex Notified bodies) publication : ExNB / 98/016 where no standards was existing for these aspects. The publication   ExNB / 98/016 was based on the ISO 9002: 1994.

This standard is based on ISO 9001 - 2000 edition and includes some specific requirements related to ATEX and Ex products.

As defined in the certifications rules and ATEX 94/9/EC directive depending of technology and products, the quality system for manufacturing of the certified products must be assessed according rules and a quality notification must be delivered by a notified body (if the manufacturer of the products respects the rules).

These rules are now for ATEX 94/9/EC certification defined in the EN ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011 standard.

Hereafter are defined the aditional part that are checked during these audits.

First of all you must remember that when an Ex product is certified by a notified body in Europe or an ExCB (according IECEx rules), then the product must be manufactured according the type of the product that was certified. For this aspect a certification file with drawings and documents accepted by the notified body is registered both by the notified body and the manufacturer. This certification file is the basis of the audit.

The manufacturer must prove to the auditor that the manufactured products are similar to the certified product. Some requirements in terms of links between the documentation from the certification file and the detailled drawings used for manufacturing, must prove that all is under control. These requirement is mainly present in chapters 4.2.3 and 7.5.

In major cases, the manufacturer is not allowed to modify the certified product. However it is possible to make changes when the Ex protection mode is not affected. For this case, the modifications are classified in 2 types :

  • major modification (that impact the protection mode and that have to be accepted or revalidated by the notified body in charge of the certification - or an other notified body)
  • minor modification that do not impact the protection mode. In this case the manufacturer is free to make changes. 

In order to be able to classify these kind of modifications, the manufacrturer must be trained to Ex rules and standards. A requirement in competency is requested by the standard for this aspect (chapter 6.2.2).

In addition, a person must be identified inside the organization chart to take into account these modifications on the manufactured products. A requirement in authority is also requested for this aspect in chapter 5.5.2.

When type tests are requested during manufacturing (pressure test, ...) then the manufacturer must be able to prove that the device used for this specific test is under control and linked with the national accreditation authority and that the tests results are linked, traceable to international or national measurement standards (see chapter 7.6).

The last big requirement that is put inside this standard is that when a product that is not complying with the Ex certificate, and having been supplied to customers, then the manufacturer’s customer can be identified, The objective of requirement of chapter 8.3 is to be able to find other products that have been delivered to other customers and for which a potential danger has been identified. An other sentence of the standard say that for all nonconforming product that has been supplied to a customer, the manufacturer shall maintain records, for a minimum period of 10 years. This links to chapter 4.2.4 of the standard.

All these previous requirements comes in addition to ISO 9001 standard. We can point out some little differences.

A first difference with ISO 9001 standard is in relation with the exclusions of some chapter of ISO 9001 such as 

Design and development (chapter 7.3). The reason for this is that the design of the product is checked during the certification of the product by the notified body.

Continual  improvement (Chapter 8.5.1.) The reason is is that when a product is certified, the changes of this product for the sole purpose of permanent improvement is not permitted where the modification impacts the protection mode.

Other exclusions are also possible. They are identified in Section 1.2 and are:

Permissible exclusions with respect to Annex VII of Directive 94/9/EC are as follows:
7.1 Planning of product realisation;
7.2.3 Customer communication;
7.4 Purchasing;
7.5.1 Control of production and service provision;
7.5.2 Validation of processes for production and service provision;
7.5.3 Identification and traceability.
No explicit requirements in Annex IV and VII relate to the concept of “continuous improvement”. As a consequence,
references in this European Standard to the requirements of EN ISO 9001:2000 exclude this concept.

An other difference is on the internal audit periodicity (chapter 8.2.2) with an interpretation that differs depending of the auditor. The objectives is not to check all the processes within a period of 12-14 months, 

Finally, for ATEX certification some other requirements of the ATEX 94/9/EC directive are checked during the audit.

The documents required by ATEX 94/9/EC Directive or the various modules are defined below: 

Annex II 1.0.6. Instruction manual 
a) All equipment and protective systems must be accompanied by an instruction manual (...) 
The instruction manual is part of the technical documentation. The manufacturer must keep the records of this instruction the same duration as the one specified for the technical documentation. 
Annex III al. 9 The manufacturer or his authorized representative established within the Community must keep with the technical documentation copies of EC type-examination certificates and their additions certificates for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the equipment or protective system. 
Annex IV al. 5 The manufacturer shall make available to the national authorities for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device: 

  • The documentation referred to in 3.1 second indent 
  • The adjustments referred to in the second paragraph of 3.4, 
  • The decisions and reports from the notified body in the final paragraph of 3.4, and in 4.3 and 4.4. 

Annex V al.3. (...) The manufacturer or his authorized representative shall keep a copy of the declaration of conformity for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device. 
Annex VI al. 3 The manufacturer or his authorized representative shall keep a copy of the declaration of conformity for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device. Where neither the manufacturer nor his authorized representative is established within the Community, the obligation to keep the technical documentation available shall be the person responsible for placing the apparatus or protective system on the Community market 
Annex VII al. 5 The manufacturer shall make available to the national authorities for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device: 

  • The documentation referred to in 3.1, third indent, 
  • The adjustments referred to in the second paragraph of 3.4, 
  • The decisions and reports from the notified body in the final paragraph of 3.4, and in 4.3 and 4.4. 

Annex VIII al. 2 The manufacturer shall establish the technical documentation described in point 3; the manufacturer or his authorized representative established within the Community must keep it at the disposal of the national authorities for inspection purposes for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device. 

These elements are mainly related to the documentation (instructions and EC type declaration of conformity), the marking (marking plate) and are identified in the following chapter :

  • § 4.2.3 : controle of records 
    • Link between the equipment, the EC type examination certificate and the CoC (b, d, e - OD 005)
    • Technical documents - (Directive 94/9/EC A III al. 9)
    • Major / minor changes (modifications)  / no factor defined within the EC type examination certificate and technical documentation is modified; (c - OD 005 - b,d  § 5.5.1 - OD 005)
    • Instructions -EC declaration of conformity - (Notice - annexe II § 1.0.6 de la directive 94/9/CE)
    • Identification of the notified body (NB) in charge of the Quality system inspection - (g - EN 13980)
    • identification of   ATEX / non- ATEXproductions / system that enables both ATEX /  non-ATEX related drawings and  drawings to be clearly identified - (f – OD 005)
    • Technical documentation shall be maintained for a period ending at least 10 years after the last equipment (…) was manufactured - (8.3 a – OD 005) - (Directive 94/9/EC A III al. 9) (8.3 a - EN 13980)

Hereafter is given the content of the standard with the different color signification

  • text similar both to ISO 9001:2000 and EN 13980:2002
  • text that is not applicable to EN 13980:2002
  • text of ISO 9001:2000 with additionnal requirements introduced by EN 13980:2002

 


CONTENTS OF THE STANDARD

Foreword.
Introduction 
1 Scope 
2 Normative references
3 Terms and definitions
4 Quality management system
4.1 General requirements
4.2 Documentation requirements
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Quality manual 

4.2.3 Control of documents
4.2.4 Control of quality records
5 Management responsibility
5.1 Management commitment
5.2 Customer focus
5.3 Quality policy.
5.4 Planning
5.4.1 Quality objectives 

5.4.2 Quality management system planning
5.5 Responsibility, authority and communication
5.5.1 Responsibility and authority
5.5.2 Management representative
5.5.3 Internal communication

5.6 Management review
5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Review input
5.6.3 Review output
6 Resource management 
6.1 Provision of resources
6.2 Human resources
6.2.1 General
6.2.2 Competence, awareness and training 
6.3 Infrastructure.
6.4 Work environment
7 Product realisation 
7.1 Planning of product realisation

7.2 Customer-related processes
7.2.1 Determination of requirements related to the product
7.2.2 Review of requirements related to the product
7.2.3 Customer communication
7.3 Design and development
7.4 Purchasing
7.4.1 Purchasing process
7.4.2 Purchasing information
7.4.3 Verification of purchased product
7.5 Production and service provision
7.5.1 Control of production and service provision
7.5.2 Validation of processes for production and service provision
7.5.3 Identification and traceability
7.5.4 Customer property
7.5.5 Preservation of product
7.6 Control of monitoring and measuring devices
8 Measurement, analysis and improvement
8.1 General
8.2 Monitoring and measurement
8.2.1 Customer satisfaction
8.2.2 Internal audit 
8.2.3 Monitoring and measurement of processes
8.2.4 Monitoring and measurement of product
8.3 Control of non-conforming product
8.4 Analysis of date
8.5 Improvement
8.5.1 Continual improvement
8.5.2 Corrective action
8.5.3 Preventive action

Annex A (informative) Information relevant to particular types of protection
Annex B (informative) Verification criteria for sintered components used as an integral part of a type of protection 
Annex ZA (informative) Clauses of this European Standard addressing essential requirements or other provisions of EU Directives
Bibliography
 

English

EN ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011-09

ISO/IEC 80079-34:2011 Explosive atmospheres -- Part 34: Application of quality systems for equipment manufacture

EN ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011 is the standard that replaces the EN 13980 standard.

This standard is based on ISO 9001 - 2008 edition and includes some specific requirements related to ATEX and Ex products.

As defined in the certifications rules and ATEX 94/9/EC directive depending of technology and products, the quality system for manufacturing of the certified products must be assessed according rules and a quality notification must be delivered by a notified body (if the manufacturer of the products respects the rules).

These rules are now for ATEX 94/9/EC certification defined in the EN ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011 standard.

Hereafter are defined the aditional part that are checked during these audits.

First of all you must remember that when an Ex product is certified by a notified body in Europe or an ExCB (according IECEx rules), then the product must be manufactured according the type of the product that was certified. For this aspect a certification file with drawings and documents accepted by the notified body is registered both by the notified body and the manufacturer. This certification file is the basis of the audit.

The manufacturer must prove to the auditor that the manufactured products are similar to the certified product. Some requirements in terms of links between the documentation from the certification file and the detailled drawings used for manufacturing, must prove that all is under control. These requirement is mainly present in chapters 4.2.3 and 7.5.

In major cases, the manufacturer is not allowed to modify the certified product. However it is possible to make changes when the Ex protection mode is not affected. For this case, the modifications are classified in 2 types :

  • major modification (that impact the protection mode and that have to be accepted or revalidated by the notified body in charge of the certification - or an other notified body)
  • minor modification that do not impact the protection mode. In this case the manufacturer is free to make changes. 

In order to be able to classify these kind of modifications, the manufacrturer must be trained to Ex rules and standards. A requirement in competency is requested by the standard for this aspect (chapter 6.2.2).

In addition, a person must be identified inside the organization chart to take into account these modifications on the manufactured products. A requirement in authority is also requested for this aspect in chapter 5.5.2.

When type tests are requested during manufacturing (pressure test, ...) then the manufacturer must be able to prove that the device used for this specific test is under control and linked with the national accreditation authority and that the tests results are linked, traceable to international or national measurement standards (see chapter 7.6).

The last big requirement that is put inside this standard is that when a product that is not complying with the Ex certificate, and having been supplied to customers, then the manufacturer’s customer can be identified, The objective of requirement of chapter 8.3 is to be able to find other products that have been delivered to other customers and for which a potential danger has been identified. An other sentence of the standard say that for all nonconforming product that has been supplied to a customer, the manufacturer shall maintain records, for a minimum period of 10 years. This links to chapter 4.2.4 of the standard.

All these previous requirements comes in addition to ISO 9001 standard. We can point out some little differences.

A first difference with ISO 9001 standard is in relation with the exclusions of some chapter of ISO 9001 such as Design and development (chapter 7.3). The reason for this is that the design of the product is checked during the certification of the product by the notified body.

An other difference is on the internal audit periodicity (chapter 8.2.2) with an interpretation that differs depending of the auditor. The objectives is not to check all the processes within a period of 12-14 months, but only to the elements of of the quality system as described in this standard to ensure that the products are in conformity with the Ex certificate.

Finally, for ATEX certification some other requirements of the ATEX 94/9/EC directive are checked during the audit.

The documents required by ATEX 94/9/EC Directive or the various modules are defined below: 

Annex II 1.0.6. Instruction manual 
a) All equipment and protective systems must be accompanied by an instruction manual (...) 
The instruction manual is part of the technical documentation. The manufacturer must keep the records of this instruction the same duration as the one specified for the technical documentation. 
Annex III al. 9 The manufacturer or his authorized representative established within the Community must keep with the technical documentation copies of EC type-examination certificates and their additions certificates for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the equipment or protective system. 
Annex IV al. 5 The manufacturer shall make available to the national authorities for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device: 

  • The documentation referred to in 3.1 second indent 
  • The adjustments referred to in the second paragraph of 3.4, 
  • The decisions and reports from the notified body in the final paragraph of 3.4, and in 4.3 and 4.4. 

Annex V al.3. (...) The manufacturer or his authorized representative shall keep a copy of the declaration of conformity for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device. 
Annex VI al. 3 The manufacturer or his authorized representative shall keep a copy of the declaration of conformity for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device. Where neither the manufacturer nor his authorized representative is established within the Community, the obligation to keep the technical documentation available shall be the person responsible for placing the apparatus or protective system on the Community market 
Annex VII al. 5 The manufacturer shall make available to the national authorities for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device: 

  • The documentation referred to in 3.1, third indent, 
  • The adjustments referred to in the second paragraph of 3.4, 
  • The decisions and reports from the notified body in the final paragraph of 3.4, and in 4.3 and 4.4. 

Annex VIII al. 2 The manufacturer shall establish the technical documentation described in point 3; the manufacturer or his authorized representative established within the Community must keep it at the disposal of the national authorities for inspection purposes for a period of at least ten years from the last date of manufacture of the device. 

These elements are mainly related to the documentation (instructions and EC type declaration of conformity), the marking (marking plate) and are identified in the following chapter :

  • § 4.2.3 : controle of records 
    • Link between the equipment, the EC type examination certificate and the CoC (b, d, e - OD 005)
    • Technical documents - (Directive 94/9/EC A III al. 9)
    • Major / minor changes (modifications)  / no factor defined within the EC type examination certificate and technical documentation is modified; (c - OD 005 - b,d  § 5.5.1 - OD 005)
    • Instructions -EC declaration of conformity - (Notice - annexe II § 1.0.6 de la directive 94/9/CE)
    • Identification of the notified body (NB) in charge of the Quality system inspection - (g - EN 13980)
    • identification of   ATEX / non- ATEXproductions / system that enables both ATEX /  non-ATEX related drawings and  drawings to be clearly identified - (f – OD 005)
    • Technical documentation shall be maintained for a period ending at least 10 years after the last equipment (…) was manufactured - (8.3 a – OD 005) - (Directive 94/9/EC A III al. 9) (8.3 a - EN 13980)

Hereafter is given the content of the standard with the different color signification

  • text similar both to ISO 9001:2008 and EN ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011
  • text that is not applicable to EN ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011
  • text of ISO 9001:2008 with additionnal requirements introduced by ISO/CEI 80079-34:2011

 


CONTENTS OF THE STANDARD

FOREWORD
INTRODUCTION
1 Scope
2 Normative references
3 Terms and definitions
4 Quality management system
4.1 General requirements
4.2 Documentation requirements
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Quality manual

4.2.3 Control of documents
4.2.4 Control of records
5 Management responsibility
5.1 Management commitment
5.2 Customer focus
5.3 Quality policy
5.4 Planning
5.4.1 Quality objectives

5.4.2 Quality management system planning
5.5 Responsibility, authority and communication
5.5.1 Responsibility and authority
5.5.2 Management representative
5.5.3 Internal communication

5.6 Management review
5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Review input
5.6.3 Review output
6 Resource management
6.1 Provision of resources
6.2 Human resources
6.2.1 General

6.2.2 Competence, training and awareness
6.3 Infrastructure
6.4 Work environment

7 Product realization
7.1 Planning of product realization
7.2 Customer-related processes
7.2.1 Determination of requirements related to the product

7.2.2 Review of requirements related to the product
7.2.3 Customer communication
7.3 Design and development
7.3.1 Design and development planning 
7.3.2 Design and development inputs
7.3.3 Design and development outputs
7.3.4 Design and development review
7.3.5 Design and development verification
7.3.6 Design and development validation

7.3.7 Control of design and development changes
7.4 Purchasing
7.4.1 Purchasing process
7.4.2 Purchasing information
7.4.3 Verification of purchased product
7.5 Production and service provision
7.5.1 Control of production and service provision
7.5.2 Validation of processes for production and service provision
7.5.3 Identification and traceability
7.5.4 Customer property
7.5.5 Preservation of product
7.6 Control of monitoring and measuring equipmentt
8 Measurement, analysis and improvement 
8.1 General
8.2 Monitoring and measurement
8.2.1 Customer satisfaction

8.2.2 Internal audit
8.2.3 Monitoring and measurement of processes
8.2.4 Monitoring and measurement of product
8.3 Control of nonconforming product
8.4 Analysis of data 
8.5 Improvement
8.5.1 Continual improvement
8.5.2 Corrective action
8.5.3 Preventive action

Annex A (informative) Information relevant to particular types of protection and specific products
Annex B (informative) Verification criteria for elements with non-measurable paths used as an integral part of a type of protection
Bibliography
Table A.1 – Component/feature compatibility

English

amendments to the 89/655/EEC directive

English

Directive 2001/45/EC amending Council Directive 89/655/EEC

Directive 2001/45/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 June 2001 amending Council Directive 89/655/EEC concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for the use of work equipment by workers at work (second individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC) (Text with EEA relevance) 

Official Journal L 195 , 19/07/2001 P. 0046 - 0049

 

Directive 2001/45/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council

of 27 June 2001

amending Council Directive 89/655/EEC concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for the use of work equipment by workers at work (second individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC)

(Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 137(2) thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the Commission, submitted after consulting the Advisory Committee on Safety, Hygiene and Health Protection at Work(1),

Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee(2),

After consulting the Committee of the Regions,

Acting in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 251 of the Treaty(3),

Whereas:

(1) Article 137(2) of the Treaty provides that the Council may adopt, by means of Directives, minimum requirements for encouraging improvements, especially in the working environment, to ensure a better level of protection of the safety and health of workers.

(2) Pursuant to the said Article, such Directives must avoid imposing administrative, financial and legal constraints in a way which would hold back the creation and development of small and medium-sized enterprises.

(3) The improvement of occupational safety, hygiene and health is an objective which may not be subordinated to purely economic considerations.

(4) Compliance with the minimum requirements designed to ensure a better standard of health and safety in the use of work equipment provided for temporary work at a height is essential to ensure the health and safety of workers.

(5) The provisions adopted pursuant to Article 137(2) of the Treaty do not prevent any Member State from maintaining or introducing such more stringent measures for the protection of working conditions as are compatible with the Treaty.

(6) Work at a height may expose workers to particularly severe risks to their health and safety, notably to the risks of falls from a height and other serious occupational accidents, which account for a large proportion of all accidents, especially of fatal accidents.

(7) Self-employed persons and employers, where they themselves pursue an occupational activity and personally use work equipment intended for carrying out temporary work at a height, may affect employees' health and safety.

(8) Council Directive 92/57/EEC of 24 June 1992 on the implementation of minimum safety and health requirements at temporary or mobile construction sites (eighth individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC)(4), imposes on these categories of persons the obligation to respect inter alia Article 4 and Annex I of Directive 89/655/EEC(5).

(9) Any employer who intends to have temporary work carried out at a height must select equipment affording adequate protection against the risks of falls from a height.

(10) In general collective protection measures to prevent falls offer better protection than personal protection measures. The selection and use of equipment appropriate to each specific site for preventing and eliminating risks should be accompanied by specific training and supplementary investigations where appropriate.

(11) Ladders, scaffolding and ropes are the equipment most commonly used in performing temporary work at a height and the safety and health of workers engaged in this type of work therefore depend to a significant extent on their correct use; the manner in which such equipment can most safely be used by workers must therefore be specified; adequate specific training of the workers is therefore required.

(12) This Directive is the most appropriate means of achieving the desired objectives and does not go beyond what is necessary for that purpose.

(13) This Directive is a practical contribution towards creating the social dimension of the internal market.

(14) Member States should be given the opportunity to make use of a transitional period to take account of the particular problems which SMEs have to face,

HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1

The text annexed to this Directive shall be added to Annex II to Directive 89/655/EEC.

Article 2

1. Member States shall adopt and publish the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive not later than 19 July 2004. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.

Member States shall have the right, as regards the implementation of section 4 of the Annex, to make use of a transitional period of not more than two years from the date mentioned in the first subparagraph, in order to take account of the various situations which might arise from the practical implementation of this Directive in particular by small and medium-sized enterprises.

2. When Member States adopt these measures, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such reference on the occasion of their official publication. The methods of making such reference shall be laid down by the Member States.

3. Member States shall notify the Commission of the provisions of national law which they have already adopted or adopt in the field covered by this Directive.

Article 3

This Directive shall enter into force on the day of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Communities.

Article 4

This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

Done at Luxembourg, 27 June 2001.

For the European Parliament

The President

N. Fontaine

For the Council

The President

A. Bourgeois

(1) OJ C 247 E, 31.8.1999, p. 23 and

OJ C 62 E, 27.2.2001, p. 113.

(2) OJ C 138, 18.5.1999, p. 30.

(3) Opinion of the European Parliament of 21 September 2000 (OJ C 146, 17.5.2001, p. 78), Council Common Position of 23 March 2001 (OJ C 142, 15.5.2001, p. 16) and Decision of the European Parliament of 14 June 2001.

(4) OJ L 245, 26.8.1992, p. 6.

(5) OJ L 393, 30.12.1989, p. 1.

ANNEX

"4. Provisions concerning the use of work equipment provided for temporary work at a height.

4.1. General provisions

4.1.1. If, pursuant to Article 6 of Directive 89/391/EEC and Article 3 of this Directive, temporary work at a height cannot be carried out safely and under appropriate ergonomic conditions from a suitable surface, the work equipment most suitable to ensure and maintain safe working conditions must be selected. Collective protection measures must be given priority over personal protection measures. The dimensions of the work equipment must be appropriate to the nature of the work to be performed and to the foreseeable stresses and allow passage without danger.

The most appropriate means of access to temporary workplaces at a height must be selected according to the frequency of passage, the height to be negotiated and the duration of use. The choice made must permit evacuation in the event of imminent danger. Passage in either direction between a means of access and platforms, decks or gangways must not give rise to any additional risks of falling.

4.1.2. Ladders may be used as work stations for work at a height only under circumstances in which, given point 4.1.1, the use of other, safer work equipment is not justified because of the low level of risk and either the short duration of use or existing features on site that the employer cannot alter.

4.1.3. Rope access and positioning techniques may be used only under circumstances where the risk assessment indicates that the work can be performed safely and where the use of other, safer work equipment is not justified.

Taking the risk assessment into account and depending in particular on the duration of the job and the ergonomic constraints, provision must be made for a seat with appropriate accessories.

4.1.4. Depending on the type of work equipment selected on the basis of the foregoing, the appropriate measures for minimising the risks to workers inherent in this type of equipment must be determined. If necessary, provision must be made for the installation of safeguards to prevent falls. These must be of suitable configuration and sufficient strength to prevent or arrest falls from a height and, as far as possible, to preclude injury to workers. Collective safeguards to prevent falls may be interrupted only at points of ladder or stairway access.

4.1.5. When the performance of a particular task requires a collective safeguard to prevent falls to be temporarily removed, effective compensatory safety measures must be taken. The task may not be performed until such measures have been taken. Once the particular task has been finished, either definitively or temporarily, the collective safeguards to prevent falls must be reinstalled.

4.1.6. Temporary work at a height may be carried out only when the weather conditions do not jeopardise the safety and health of workers.

4.2. Specific provisions regarding the use of ladders.

4.2.1. Ladders must be so positioned as to ensure their stability during use. Portable ladders must rest on a stable, strong, suitably-sized, immobile footing so that the rungs remain horizontal. Suspended ladders must be attached in a secure manner and, with the exception of rope ladders, so that they cannot be displaced and so that swinging is prevented.

4.2.2. The feet of portable ladders must be prevented from slipping during use by securing the stiles at or near their upper or lower ends, by any anti-slip device or by any other arrangement of equivalent effectiveness. Ladders used for access must be long enough to protrude sufficiently beyond the access platform, unless other measures have been taken to ensure a firm handhold. Interlocking ladders and extension ladders must be used so that the different sections are prevented from moving relative to one another. Mobile ladders must be prevented from moving before they are stepped on.

4.2.3. Ladders must be used in such a way that a secure handhold and secure support are available to workers at all times. In particular, if a load has to be carried by hand on a ladder, it must not preclude the maintenance of a safe handhold.

4.3. Specific provisions regarding the use of scaffolding

4.3.1. When a note of the calculations for the scaffolding selected is not available or the note does not cover the structural arrangements contemplated, strength and stability calculations must be carried out unless the scaffolding is assembled in conformity with a generally recognised standard configuration.

4.3.2. Depending on the complexity of the scaffolding chosen, an assembly, use and dismantling plan must be drawn up by a competent person. This may be in the form of a standard plan, supplemented by items relating to specific details of the scaffolding in question.

4.3.3. The bearing components of scaffolding must be prevented from slipping, whether by attachment to the bearing surface, provision of an anti-slip device or any other means of equivalent effectiveness, and the load-bearing surface must have a sufficient capacity. It must be ensured that the scaffolding is stable. Wheeled scaffolding must be prevented by appropriate devices from moving accidentally during work at a height.

4.3.4. The dimensions, form and layout of scaffolding decks must be appropriate to the nature of the work to be performed and suitable for the loads to be carried and permit work and passage in safety. Scaffolding decks must be assembled in such a way that their components cannot move in normal use. There must be no dangerous gap between the deck components and the vertical collective safeguards to prevent falls.

4.3.5. When parts of a scaffolding are not ready for use, for example during assembly, dismantling or alteration, they must be marked with general warning signs in accordance with the national provisions transposing Directive 92/58/EEC and be suitably delimited by physical means preventing access to the danger zone.

4.3.6. Scaffolding may be assembled, dismantled or significantly altered only under the supervision of a competent person and by workers who must have received appropriate and specific training in the operations envisaged, addressing specific risks in accordance with Article 7, and more particularly in:

(a) understanding of the plan for the assembly, dismantling or alteration of the scaffolding concerned;

(b) safety during the assembly, dismantling or alteration of the scaffolding concerned;

(c) measures to prevent the risk of persons or objects falling;

(d) safety measures in the event of changing weather conditions which could adversely affect the safety of the scaffolding concerned;

(e) permissible loads;

(f) any other risks which the abovementioned assembly, dismantling or alteration operations may entail.

The person supervising and the workers concerned must have available the assembly and dismantling plan referred to in 4.3.2., including any instructions it may contain.

4.4. Specific provisions regarding the use of rope access and positioning techniques

The use of rope access and positioning techniques must comply with the following conditions:

(a) the system must comprise at least two separately anchored ropes, one as a means of access, descent and support (work rope) and the other as backup (security rope);

(b) workers must be provided with and use an appropriate harness and be connected by it to the security rope;

(c) the work rope must be equipped with safe means of ascent and descent and have a self-locking system to prevent the user falling should he lose control of his movements. The security rope must be equipped with a mobile fall prevention system which follows the movements of the worker;

(d) the tools and other accessories to be used by a worker must be secured to the worker's harness or seat or by some other appropriate means;

(e) the work must be properly planned and supervised, so that a worker can be rescued immediately in an emergency;

(f) in accordance with Article 7, the workers concerned must receive adequate training specific to the operations envisaged, in particular rescue procedures.

In exceptional circumstances where, in view of the assessment of risks, the use of a second rope would make the work more dangerous, the use of a single rope may be permitted, provided that appropriate measures have been taken to ensure safety in accordance with national legislation and/or practice."

 

English

DIRECTIVE 95/63/EC amending Directive 89/655/EEC

Council Directive 95/63/EC of 5 December 1995 amending Directive 89/655/EEC concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for the use of work equipment by workers at work (second individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16 (1) of Directive 89/391/EEC) 

Official Journal L 335 , 30/12/1995 P. 0028 - 0036

COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 95/63/EC

of 5 December 1995

amending Directive 89/655/EEC concerning the minimum safety and health requirements for the use of work equipment by workers at work (second individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16 (1) of Directive 89/391/EEC)

THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 118a thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the Commission (1),

Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee (2),

Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 189c (3),

Whereas Article 118a of the Treaty provides that the Council shall adopt by means of directives, minimum requirements for encouraging improvements, especially in the working environment, as regards the health and safety of workers;

Whereas, pursuant to the said Article, such Directives must avoid imposing administrative, financial and legal constraints in a way which would hold back the creation and development of small and medium-sized undertakings;

Whereas compliance with the minimum requirements designed to guarantee a better standard of safety and health in the use of work equipment is essential to ensure the safety and health of workers;

Whereas, therefore, Member States must take measures to facilitate implementation of the provisions of this Directive by undertakings, in particular small and medium-sized undertakings; whereas such measures may include training and information activities adapted to the specific requirements of the various sectors of the economy;

Whereas provisions adopted pursuant to Article 118a of the Treaty do not prevent each Member State from establishing and maintaining more stringent protective measures, compatible with this Treaty, governing conditions of work;

Whereas Article 9 (1) o Directive 89/655/EEC (4) provides for the addition to the Annex of the supplementary minimum requirements applicable to work equipment referred to in point 3 of the Annex, in accordance with the procedure provided for in Article 118a of the Treaty;

Whereas this Directive must confine itself to defining the objectives to be achieved and the principles to be respected leaving Member States free to decide how national legislation will be complied with and improved upon;

Whereas the Member States shall, after consultation with both sides of industry, and with due allowance for national legislation and/or practice, establish procedures whereby a level of safety may be attained corresponding to the objectives indicated by Annex II to this Directive;

Whereas this Directive constitutes a practical element in realizing the social dimension of the internal market,

HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

Article 1

Directive 89/655/EEC is hereby amended as follows:

1. Article 4 shall be amended as follows:

(a) in paragraph 1 (a) (ii) and (b), 'in the Annex' shall be replaced by 'in Annex I';

(b) the following point is inserted in paragraph 1:

'(c) without prejudice to point (a) (i), and notwithstanding point (a) (ii) and point (b), specific work equipment subject to the requirements of point 3 of Annex I, which, if already provided to workers in the undertaking and/or establishment by 5 December 1998, complies with the minimum requirements laid down in Annex I, no later than four years after that date';

(c) the following paragraph shall be added:

'3. Member States shall, after consultation with both sides of industry, and with due allowance for national legislation and/or practice, establish procedures whereby a level of safety may be attained corresponding to the objectives indicated by the provisions of Annex II.'

2. The following Article shall be inserted:

'Article 4a

Inspection of work equipment

1. The employer shall ensure that where the safety of work equipment depends on the installation conditions, it shall be subject to an initial inspection (after installation and before first being put into service) and an inspection after assembly at a new site or in a new location by competent persons within the meaning of national laws and/or practices, to ensure that the work equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly.

2. The employer shall ensure that work equipment exposed to conditions causing deterioration which is liable to result in dangerous situations is subject to:

- periodic inspections and, where appropriate, testing by competent persons within the meaning of national laws and/or practices,

- special inspections by competent persons within the meaning of national laws and/or practices each time that exceptional circumstances which are liable to jeopardize the safety of the work equipment have occurred, such as modification work, accidents, natural phenomena or prolonged periods of inactivity,

to ensure that health and safety conditions are maintained and that the deterioration can be detected and remedied in good time.

3. The results of inspections must be recorded and kept at the disposal of the authorities concerned. They must be kept for a suitable period of time.

When work equipment is used outside the undertaking it must be accompanied by physical evidence that the last inspection has been carried out.

4. Member States shall determine the conditions under which such inspections are made.';

3. the following Article shall be inserted:

'Article 5a

Ergonomics and occupational health

The working posture and position of workers while using work equipment and ergonomic principles must be taken fully into account by the employer when applying minimum health and safety requirements.';

4. the following subparagraph shall be added at the end of Article 6 (2):

'Workers must be made aware of dangers relevant to them, work equipment present in the work area or site, and any changes affecting them, in as much as they affect work equipment situated in their immediate work area or site, even if they do not use such equipment directly.';

5. in Article 8, 'the Annex' is replaced by 'the Annexes';

6. Article 9 shall be amended as follows:

- in the title to the Article, 'of the Annex' shall be replaced by 'of the Annexes',

- in paragraph 1, 'the Annex' where it appears twice in the text shall be replaced by 'Annex I',

- in paragraph 2, 'the Annex' shall be replaced by 'the Annexes';

7. the Annex, which becomes Annex I, shall be amended in conformity with Annex I to this Directive;

8. an Annex II shall be added, the text of which is set out in Annex II to this Directive.

Article 2

1. Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive before 5 December 1995. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.

When Member States adopt these provisions, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such reference on the occasion of their official publication The methods of making such reference shall be laid down by Member States.

2. Member States shall communicate to the Commission the provisions of national law which they have already adopted or which they adopt in the field governed by this Directive.

3. The Commission shall periodically present a report on the implementation of this Directive to the European Parliament, the Council and the Economic and Social Committee.

Article 3

This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

Done at Brussels, 5 December 1995.

For the Council

The President

J. A. GRIÑÁN

(1) OJ No C 104, 12. 4. 1994, p. 4; and OJ No C 246, 22. 9. 1995, p. 3.

(2) OJ No C 397, 31. 12. 1994, p. 13.

(3) Opinion of the European Parliament of 17 February 1995 (OJ No C 56, 6. 3. 1995, p. 175), Council common position of 24 July 1995 (OJ No C 281, 25. 10. 1995, p. 41) and Decision of the European Parliament of 17 November 1995 (OJ No C 323, 4. 12. 1995).

(4) OJ No L 393, 30. 12. 1989, p. 13.

ANNEX I

The Annex (which becomes Annex I) to Directive 89/655/EEC is amended as follows:

1. the following paragraph shall be added to the general comment:

'The following minimum requirements, in as much as they apply to work equipment in use, do not necessarily call for the same measures as the essential requirements concerning new work equipment.';

2. in point 2.1, the last paragraph is replaced by the following text:

'Control systems must be safe and must be chosen making due allowance for the failures, faults and constraints to be expected in the planned circumstances of use.';

3. Point 3 is replaced by the following text:

'3. Additional minimum requirements applicable to specific types of work equipment

3.1. Minimum requirements for mobile work equipment, whether or not self-propelled

3.1.1. Work equipment with ride-on workers must be fitted out in such a way as to reduce the risks for workers during the journey.

Those risks must include the risks of contact with or trapping by wheels or tracks.

3.1.2. Where an inadvertent seizure of the drive unit between an item of mobile work equipment and its accessories and/or anything towed might create a specific risk, such work equipment must be equipped or adapted to prevent blockages of the drive units.

Where such seizure cannot be avoided, every possible measure must be taken to avoid any adverse effects on workers.

3.1.3. Where drive shafts for the transmission of energy between mobile items of work equipment can become soiled or damaged by trailing on the ground, facilities must be available for fixing them.

3.1.4. Mobile work equipment with ride-on workers must be designed to restrict, under actual conditions of use, the risks arising from work equipment rollover:

- either by a protection structure to ensure that the equipment does not tilt by more than a quarter turn, or

- a structure giving sufficient clearance around the ride-on workers if the tilting movement can continue beyond a quarter turn, or

- by some other device of equivalent effect.

These protection structures may be an integral part of the work equipment.

These protection structures are not required when the work equipment is stabilized during operation or where the design makes roll over impossible.

Where there is a risk of a ride-on worker being crushed between parts of the work equipment and the ground, should the equipment roll over, a restraining system for the ride-on workers must be installed.

3.1.5. Fork-lift trucks carrying one or more workers must be adapted or equipped to limit the risk of the fork-lift truck overturning, e. g.:

- by the installation of an enclosure for the driver, or

- by a structure preventing the fork-lift truck from overturning, or

- by a structure ensuring that, if the fork-lift truck overturns, sufficient clearance remains between the ground and certain parts of the fork-lift truck for the workers carried, or

- by a structure restraining the workers on the driving seat so as to prevent them from being crushed by parts of the fork-lift truck which overturns.

3.1.6. Self-propelled work equipment which may, in motion, engender risks for persons must fulfil the following conditions:

(a) the equipment must have facilities for preventing unauthorized start-up;

(b) it must have appropriate facilities for minimizing the consequences of a collision where there is more than one item of track-mounted work equipment in motion at the same time;

(c) there must be a device for braking and stopping equipment. Where safety constraints so require, emergency facilities operated by readily accessible controls or automatic systems must be available for braking and stopping equipment in the event of failure of the main facility;

(d) where the driver's direct field of vision is inadequate to ensure safety, adequate auxiliary devices must be installed to improve visibility;

(e) work equipment designed for use at night or in dark places must be equipped with lighting appropriate to the work to be carried out and must ensure sufficient safety for workers;

(f) work equipment which constitutes a fire hazard, either on its own or in respect of whatever it is towing and/or carrying and which is liable to endanger workers, must be equipped with appropriate fire-fighting appliances where such appliances are not available sufficiently nearby at the place of use;

(g) remote-controlled work equipment must stop automatically once it leaves the control range;

(h) remote-controlled work equipment which may in normal conditions engender a crushing or impact hazard must have facilities to guard against this risk, unless other appropriate devices are present to control the impact risk.

3.2. Minimum requirements for work equipment for lifting loads

3.2.1. When work equipment for lifting loads is installed permanently, its strength and stability during use must be assured, having regard, in particular, to the loads to be lifted and the stress induced at the mounting or fixing point of the structures.

3.2.2. Machinery for lifting loads must be clearly marked to indicate its nominal load, and where appropriate a load plate giving the nominal load for each configuration of the machinery.

Accessories for lifting must be marked in such a way that it is possible to identify the characteristics essential for safe use.

Work equipment which is not designed for lifting persons but which might be so used in error must be appropriately and clearly marked to this effect.

3.2.3. Permanently installed work equipment must be installed in such a way as to reduce the risk of the load:

(a) striking workers;

(b) drifting dangerously or falling freely;

(c) being released unintentionally.

3.2.4. Work equipment for lifting or moving workers must be such as to:

(a) prevent the risk of the car falling, where one exists, by suitable devices;

(b) prevent the risk of the user himself falling from the car, where one exists;

(c) prevent the risk of the user being crushed, trapped or struck, in particular through inadvertent contact with objects;

(d) ensure that persons trapped in the car in the event of an incident are not exposed to danger and can be freed.

If, for reasons inherent in the site and height differences, the risks referred to in point (a) cannot be avoided by any safety measures, an enhanced safety coefficient suspension rope must be installed and checked every working day.'

ANNEX II

'ANNEX II

PROVISIONS CONCERNING THE USE OF WORK EQUIPMENT REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 4 (3)

0. General comment

The obligations laid down in this Annex apply having regard to the provisions of this Directive and where the corresponding risk exists for the work equipment in question.

1. General provisions for all work equipment

1.1. Work equipment must be installed, located and used in such a way as to reduce risks to users of the work equipment and for other workers, for example by ensuring that there is sufficient space between the moving parts of work equipment and fixed or moving parts in its environment and that all forms of energy and substances used or produced can be supplied and/or removed in a safe manner.

1.2. Work equipment must be erected or dismantled under safe conditions, in particular observing any instructions which may have been furnished by the manufacturer.

1.3. Work equipment which may be struck by lightning while being used must be protected by devices or appropriate means against the effects of lightning.

2. Provisions concerning the use of mobile equipment, whether or not self-propelled

2.1. Self-propelled work equipment shall be driven only by workers who have been appropriately trained in the safe driving of such equipment.

2.2. If work equipment is moving around in a work area, appropriate traffic rules must be drawn up and followed.

2.3. Organizational measures must be taken to prevent workers on foot coming within the area of operation of self-propelled work equipment.

If work can be done properly only if workers on foot are present, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent them from being injured by the equipment.

2.4. The transport of workers on mechanically driven mobile work equipment is authorized only where safe facilities are provided to this effect. If work must be carried out during the journey, speeds must be adjusted as necessary.

2.5. Mobile work equipment with a combustion engine may not be used in working areas unless sufficient quantities of air presenting no health or safety risk to workers can be guaranteed.

3. Provisions concerning the use of work equipment for lifting loads

3.1. General considerations

3.1.1. Work equipment which is mobile or can be dismantled and which is designed for lifting loads must be used in such a way as to ensure the stability of the work equipment during use under all foreseeable conditions, taking into account the nature of the ground.

3.1.2. Persons may be lifted only by means of work equipment and accessories provided for this purpose.

Without prejudice to Article 5 of Directive 89/391/EEC, exceptionally, work equipment which is not specifically designed for the purpose of lifting persons may be used to this effect, provided appropriate action has been taken to ensure safety in accordance with national legislation and/or practice laying down appropriate supervision.

While workers are on work equipment designed for lifting loads the control position must be manned at all times. Persons being lifted must have reliable means of communication. In the event of danger, there must be reliable means of evacuating them.

3.1.3. Unless required for the effective operation of the work, measures must be taken to ensure that workers are not present under suspended loads.

Loads may not be moved above unprotected workplaces usually occupied by workers.

Where that is the case, if work cannot be carried out properly any other way, appropriate procedures must be laid down and applied.

3.1.4. Lifting accessories must be selected as a function of the loads to be handled, gripping points, attachment tackle and the atmospheric conditions having regard to the mode and configuration of slinging. Lifting accessory tackle must be clearly marked so that users are aware of its characteristics where such tackle is not dismantled after use.

3.1.5. Lifting accessories must be stored in a way that ensures that they will not be damaged or degraded.

3.2. Work equipment for lifting non-guided loads

3.2.1. When two or more items of work equipment used for lifting non-guided loads are installed or erected on a site in such a way that their working radii overlap, appropriate measures must be taken to avoid collision between loads and/or the work equipment parts themselves.

3.2.2. When using mobile work equipment for lifting non-guided loads, measures must be taken to prevent the equipment from tilting, overturning or, if necessary, moving or slipping. Checks must be made to ensure that these measures are executed properly.

3.2.3. If the operator of work equipment designed for lifting non-guided loads cannot observe the full path of the load either directly or by means of auxiliary equipment providing the necessary information, a competent person must be in communication with the operator to guide him and organizational measures must be taken to prevent collisions of the load which could endanger workers.

3.2.4. Work must be organized in such a way that when a worker is attaching or detaching a load by hand, it can be done safely, in particular through the worker retaining direct or indirect control of the work equipment.

3.2.5. All lifting operations must be properly planned, appropriately supervised and carried out to protect the safety of workers.

In particular, if a load has to be lifted by two or more pieces of work equipment for lifting non-guided loads simultaneously, a procedure must be established and applied to ensure good coordination on the part of the operators.

3.2.6. If work equipment designed for lifting non-guided loads cannot maintain its hold on the load in the event of a complete or partial power failure, appropriate measures must be taken to avoid exposing workers to any resultant risks.

Suspended loads must not be left without surveillance unless access to the danger zone is prevented and the load has been safely suspended and is safely held.

3.2.7. Open-air use of work equipment designed for lifting non-guided loads must be halted when meteorological conditions deteriorate to the point of jeopardizing the safe use of the equipment and exposing workers to risks. Adequate protection measures, in particular, to avoid work equipment turning over must be taken to avoid any risks to workers.'

 

English

RASE european project

EU Project No: SMT4-CT97-2169 - The RASE Project

Explosive Atmosphere: Risk Assessment of Unit Operations and Equipment

Report: Methodology for the Risk Assessment of Unit Operations and Equipment for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

Project Co-ordinator:

Dr. R. L. Rogers, INBUREX GmbH

Project participants:

INBUREX       Germany

HSE  England

FSA    Germany

INERIS  France

NIRO    Denmark

CMR      Norway

Date:    17th March 2000


Important Information for Readers

This report has been prepared as part of the RASE Project – “Explosive Atmosphere: Risk Assessment of  Unit  Operations  and  Equipment”  A  joint  industry  /  European  Commission  Project  under  the dedicated call of the European Commission’s Standards Measurement and Testing programme concerned with subjects relating to the standardisation activities of CEN.

The RASE project objective was to develop a Risk Assessment Methodology for Unit Operations and Equipment to help manufacturers of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres meet the requirements of the EU Directives 89/392/EC (machinery directive) and 94/9/EC (ATEX 100A). It will also be useful to satisfy the requirement in Directive 99/92/EC (ATEX 137A) for users of such equipment to produce an explosion protection document. It is intended that the results of the RASE project be incorporated into this standard by the relevant working group CEN/TC305/WG4.

In the project a review of the current status was carried out in which a questionnaire was developed and replies received from over 200 manufacturers and users and a review of existing risk assessment techniques carried out. A draft risk assessment methodology was developed and used in trials with equipment manufacturers. These showed that the basic framework of the developed methodology was suitable  and  that  when  the  suggested  proformas  were  used  for  recording  the  results,  the  risk assessment which has been carried out can be clearly followed. However it was clear from the trials that manufacturers have extreme difficulty in applying the methodology. as the subject of risk assessment is extremely complex and it is unlikely that someone without experience in the field can simply take the proposed draft and directly apply it to their problem. The project team therefore developed  and  included  a  ‘User-Guide’  which  contains  detailed  examples  of  the  use  of  the methodology for assessing the risk associated with different types of equipment and unit operations. The completed draft of the risk assessment methodology is now being widely circulated for comments and has been passed to the relevant technical committees of CEN and CENELEC for further development into a European standard.

The RASE project is co-ordinated by INBUREX in Germany with the participation of FSA Germany, INERIS France, HSE England, NIRO Denmark and CMR Norway. The project started in Dec 1997 and is due for completion in May 2000.

Further information about the RASE project can be obtained from the Project Co-ordinator: Dr. R.L. Rogers

Inburex GmbH

Wilhelmstr.2, D-59067 Hamm, Germany

Tel +49 2381 271610   Fax +49 2381 271620

Email  Richard.Rogers@inburex.com

In the interests of promoting process safety this document is provided for open circulation. Where the document of parts thereof are used the following acknowledgements should be made:

The RASE project (Risk Assessment of Unit Operations and Equipment) is a joint industry / EU Commission project carried out under Contract No: SMT4-CT97-

2169. The project is co-ordinated by INBUREX in Germany with the participation of FSA, INERIS, HSE, NIRO and CMR.

This  document  can  be  down  loaded  from  the  ‘Library  Area’  of  the  SAFETYNET  web  site www.safetynet.de

RASE Project Participants

Dr. R.L. Rogers

Dr. B. Broeckmann Inburex GmbH Wilhelmstr 2

D-59067 Hamm

Deutschland

Tel: +49 (0) 2381 271610

Fax: +49 (0) 2381 271620 email: Richard.Rogers@inburex.com Bernd.Broeckmann@inburex.com


Ms N. Worsell

Health and Safety Laboratory

Broad Lane

S3 7HK Sheffield

England

Tel: +44 114 289 2635

Fax: +44 114 289 2444

email: nicola.worsell@hsl.gov.uk


Prof. Dr. S. Radandt

Dr. K.-H. Grass

FSA eV Dynamostr. 7-9

D-68136 Mannheim

Deutschland

Tel: +49-621-4456-3401

Fax: +49-621-4456-3402 email: radandt@bgn.de grass@bgn.de


Dr. J-P. Pineau Ms C. Loyer INERIS

Parc Technologique Alata B.P. 2

F-60550 Verneuil en Halatte

France

Tel: +33 3 44 55 65 14

Fax: +33 3 44 55 66 55

Email:

Jean-Philippe.Pineau@ineris.fr

Celine.Loyer@ineris.fr


Mr.C. Schwartzbach Niro A/S Gladsaxevej 305

DK-2860 Soeborg

Denmark

Tel: +45 3954 5437

Fax: +45 3954 5800

email: cs@niro.dk


Dr. K. van Wingerden

CMR

Fantoftvegen 38

N-5036 Fanthoft

Norway

Tel: +47 55 57 4316

Fax: +47 55 57 4041

email: kees@cmr.no


Contents

0       Introduction .........................................................................................5

1       Scope.....................................................................................................10

2       Normative references..........................................................................12

3       Definitions............................................................................................13

4       Aspects on how to influence explosion risks.....................................14

5       Risk assessment procedure.................................................................18

5.1    Determination of intended use...........................................................20

5.2    Hazard Identification..........................................................................23

5.3    Risk Estimation....................................................................................29

5.4    Risk Evaluation....................................................................................32

5.5    Risk Reduction Option Analysis.........................................................33

6       Methods and/or techniques that could favourably be applied........36

Informative Annexes

Annex I               Equipment characteristics.............................................47

Annex II             Operational aspects and influences...............................50

Annex III            Human factors and organisational aspects...................55

Annex IV            Risk estimation and evaluation......................................56

Annex V             List of risk assessment techniques.................................58

Annex VI            Examples: Application of risk assessment methodology....................................................................93


you can download the RASE project in PDF form

0  Introduction

Risks arising from the hazard of an explosion are described in the Machinery Directive and further developed in the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. In terms of producing a safe machine, piece of equipment or protective system the principles of Safety Integration are the core of both Directives and should be fully understood before any work is started on the design. The strategy gives the following approach:

-            Carry out a risk assessment to identify and evaluate any relevant hazard and on the basis of the risk assessment

-       eliminate or minimise the risks by

Design measures;

Provision of protective devices;

Provision of information on residual risks; Details of any precautions needed to be taken.

Essential Health and Safety Requirement 1.5.7 (Explosion) of the Machinery Directive overlaps the requirements of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. However, Article 1.4 of the Machinery Directive states that where there is another Directive dealing with a specific risk that Directive will take precedence over the Machinery Directive for that particular risk. Therefore in order to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirement 1.5.7 of the Machinery Directive, it is necessary to comply with the ATEX Directive. If there is an explosion risk which is outside of the scope of the ATEX Directive then the original Machinery Directive will apply.

The manufacturer can choose one of the two ways of conforming with the technical measures required by the Directive:

-       Interpret the technical measures directly from the Essential Health and Safety

Requirements or

-            use a Harmonised European Standard produced by CEN/CENELEC under a mandate and placed in the Official Journal of the CEC.

For all machines, equipment and protective systems with a potential explosion hazard, compliance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive and the ATEX Directive can be achieved by following the principles contained in EN

292 Machinery Safety, EN 1050 Risk Assessment and EN 1127-1 Explosion

Prevention and Protection.

This standard applies the principles contained in these standards to the specific requirement of carrying out a risk assessment considering the hazard of an explosion.

This type A standard describes principles for a systematic procedure for risk assessment of hazardous situations arising from explosive atmospheres in the following cases:

-      an intended internal explosive atmosphere is present during normal operation or when a malfunction occurs, within the equipment causing a possible release to the surroundings,

-      the explosive atmospheres pre-exist in the surroundings.

Such being the case, explosion risks shall be assessed overall.

This standard follows the Directive 94/9/EC, the so-called ATEX 100a - Directive. Its objective is to eliminate or at least minimise the risks resulting from the use of certain products in or in relation to a potentially explosive atmosphere. Therefore, ATEX 100a Directive is a risk-related Directive and consequently a risk assessment has to be made. This is a challenge, because the traditional approach to safety in the process industries was an ad-hoc one of learning from experience.

Compliance with the essential health and safety requirements of ATEX 100a Directive is imperative in order to ensure that equipment and protective systems do not pose a hazard in explosive atmospheres. The requirements are intended to take account of existing or potential hazards deriving from the design and construction. However, following the philosophy of ATEX 100a Directive the notion of intended use is also of prime importance. It’s also essential that manufacturers supply full information which is required for the safe functioning of equipment and protective systems.

To meet the requirements of ATEX 100a Directive it’s therefore absolutely ne- cessary to conduct a risk assessment. Due to item 1.0.1 of Annex II ma- nufacturers are under an obligation to design equipment and protective systems from the  point of  view of  integrated explosion safety.  Integrated explosion safety mainly refers to preventing the formation of explosive atmospheres as well as sources of ignition and, should an explosion nevertheless occur, to halt it immediately and / or to limit its effects. Thus the manufacturer must take measures to deal with the risks of explosion. In addition, as required in item

1.0.2 of the Directive, equipment and protective systems must be designed and manufactured after due analysis of possible operating faults in order as far as possible to preclude dangerous situations.

Bearing in mind these commitments resulting from the correct application of ATEX 100a Directive requirements, a methodology on risk assessment should not only deal with designing and constructing aspects but also identify the information which has to be supplied for safe use.

Thus the risk assessment should cover all aspects of the use of the equipment including, for example, start up, shut down and possible disturbances to ensure that the various safeguards and / or safety barriers are effective and that the user/operator is aware of the safety concepts and their operation.

It is in both the manufacturer’s and user’s interest to establish a common methodology for achieving safety, reliability and efficacy in functioning and operating of equipment and protective systems with respect to the risks of explosion. In this respect, risk assessment is a tool which provides the essential link between manufacturers and users. Whereas the products must be used in accordance with the equipment group and category and with all the information supplied by the manufacturer, often the severity or consequences of an incident can only be defined by the users themselves. Thus both the knowledge base of the manufacturer plus the plant specific experience of users is required to carry out an effective risk assessment. Detailed harmonised standards cannot be developed for all types of assemblies, therefore this standard is intended to help the manufacturer carry out a risk assessment and to select one or more appropriate methods of risk assessment. The same methods may also be applied by the user, where he is responsible for designing and building a process plant, using components bought from many sources. In this case a risk assessment is also required as part of the explosion protection document required under the ATEX 137 Directive.

In  this  context  this  standard  is  a  guideline  for  explosion  prevention  and protection by means of risk assessment. It sets the structure of what needs to be done with respect to the Risk Assessment of Equipment and Unit Operations for use in potentially explosive atmospheres and an indication of how to do this. A detailed description of how to carry out a Risk Assessment of a specific type of equipment will be reserved to Type C standards.

It’s important to recognise that the ATEX 100a Directive defines various categories of equipment which must be capable of functioning to the required level of protection measures in conformity with the operational parameters established by the manufacturer.

It follows that the performance of the protection measures as well as the conditions  of  operation  are  aligned  to  the  protection  level  required  by  the various  categories.  Therefore  there  exists  a  relation  between  categories,

performance and conditions of operation (see table 1).

It is clear that before a risk assessment can be carried out, the manufacturer must decide which category of equipment is to be achieved taking into account the protection level required and its intended use.

The way in which the categorisation has been developed highlights one of the main distinctions of Group I and II.

For Group I, the categorisation depends on, amongst other factors, whether the mining equipment is to be de-energised in the event of an explosive atmosphere occurring.

For Group II, it depends on which “Zone” the equipment is intended to be used in, and whether a potentially explosive atmosphere is always present, or is likely to occur for a long or a short period of time.

The “Zone” indicates the likelihood that a potentially explosive atmosphere is present i. e. whether it is always present, present for a long period of time or seldom present. The definitions for the different zones for both gas and dust atmospheres is given in EN 1127-1.

 

LEVEL OF 

PROTECTION

CATEGORY

 

Group I Group II

PERFORMANCE OF 

PROTECTION

CONDITIONS OF 

OPERATION

 

 

 

 

Very High

 

 

 

 

M1

 

Two independent means of protection or safe even when two faults occur independently of each other.

Equipment remains functioning when explosive atmosphere present

 

 

 

High

 

 

 

M2

 

Suitable for normal

operation and severe operating conditions

Equipment de-

energised when explosive atmosphere present

 

 

 

 

Very High

 

 

 

 

 

1

Two independent means of protection or safe even when two faults occur independently of each other.

Equipment remains functioning in Zones 0, 1, 2 and 20, 21, 22

 

 

 

 

 

High

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Suitable for normal

operation and frequently occurring disturbances or equipment where faults are normally

taken into account

Equipment

remains functioning in Zones 1,2 and/or 21,22

 

 

Normal

 

 

 

3

Suitable for normal

operation

Equipment

remains functioning in Zone 2 and/or 22

Table 1: Various categories of equipment in conformity with certain levels of protection


1.   Scope

A methodology on Risk Assessment should consider the risk of harm to human as well as environmental and property damage resulting from explosion risks. In the case of an undesired event the effective range of an explosion often depends on a multiplicity of factors some of which are not easy to anticipate.

This standard establishes general principles for the procedure known as risk assessment when explosive atmospheres are present for any reason and can create hazardous situations.

The knowledge and experience of the design, use, incidents, accidents and damage related to these situations are brought together in order to assess the risks during all phases of the life of an item of equipment or protective system.

The type of equipment that the methodology is aimed at comprises all products covered by the ATEX 100a Directive. The term “product” covers equipment, machines, protective systems, apparatus, devices, components and their combinations.

Products can be divided as follows:

1.  Components, - these can be considered to include bearings, terminals, flameproof enclosure, heating elements

2.  Equipment, – this can be considered to include small discrete items such as motors, gearboxes, brakes, switches, lights, pumps

3.  Complete machines or equipment, – these can be  considered to be characterised by fairly simple controls, such as vacuum cleaner, aerosol can filling machine, spray dryer, bucket elevator

4.  Complex products, - these can be considered to be characterised by complex controls, perhaps with incorporated protective systems etc. and made up of several discrete items, such as petrol pump, self-contained distillation unit, lift truck, oilseed extraction plant

5.  Autonomous protective systems,– these can be considered to include flame arrestors, pressure-relief systems, explosion suppression systems, explosion decoupling systems, etc.

The complexity of a risk assessment will be different for different types of products. For a simple product like a friction clutch, where all the failure modes can be readily identified, the risk assessment will be simple. Some of the more complex techniques described in this standard will then not be applicable, however the basic methodology described remains applicable and should be applied.

It should be recognised that components being safe and explosion proofed are necessary   for   the   safe   functioning   of   ATEX   products.   However,   safe components do not guarantee explosion prevention and protection of ATEX products even if the components have undergone successful testing. Therefore, the ATEX 100a Directive requires in Annex II, 1.6: Integration of safety requirements relating to the system”. This includes, for example, that the interface  must  be  safe,  when  ATEX  products  are  intended  for  use  in combination with other equipment and protective systems. Furthermore, equipment and protective systems must be designed and constructed in such a way as to prevent hazards arising from connections.

In addition, the ATEX 100a Directive requires that any misuse which can reasonably be anticipated must be taken into consideration in the evaluation of the hazard.

The philosophy underlying the principles of explosion prevention and protection are described in chapter 4 of this standard while chapter 5 provides a detailed description of the steps involved in risk assessment.

A brief review of the different methods and techniques which can be used and their range of applicability is given in chapter 6. Annex VI gives information and examples on how the risk assessment methodology can be applied in practice.

 

12

2.  Normative references

This European Standard incorporates, by dated or undated reference, provisions from other publications. The publications are listed hereafter. For dated references, subsequent amendments to or revisions of any of these publications apply to this European Standard only when incorporated in it by amendment or revision. For undated references the latest edition of the publication referred to applies.

EN 292-1, 1991 Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for design – part 1: Basic terminology, methodology

EN 292-2, 1991 Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for design – part 2: Technical principles and specifications

EN 954-1, 1996 Safety of machinery – Safety related parts of control systems – Part 1: General principles for design

EN 1050, 1996 Safety of machinery – Risk assessment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The RASE Project                                              Final Methodolgy                                                          RASE2000

Explosive atmospheres – Explosion prevention and protection

Part 1: Basic concepts and methodology

prEN 13463-1 Non-electrical equipment for potentially explosive atmospheres

Part 1: Basic methodology and requirements

EN 50014        Electrical  apparatus  for  potentially  explosive  atmospheres  – General requirements

IEC 60812       Analysis techniques for system reliability-procedure for failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA)

IEC 61025       Fault Tree Analysis (FTA)

IEC 61882, Ed. 1  Hazard  and  operability  (HAZOP)  studies  –  Guide  word approach

Note: This list is not exhaustive other normative references may also apply

3.   Definitions

For the purpose of this standard the following terms shall have the meanings:

Risk:  Function  of  Severity  (elements:  possible  harm  for  the  considered explosion hazard) and Probability of occurrence of that harm (elements: frequency and duration of exposure, probability of occurrence of hazardous event, possibility to avoid or limit the harm).

Risk Assessment: A series of logical steps to enable, in a systematic way, the examination of the hazards associated with unit operations and equipment.

Hazard Identification: A systematic procedure for finding all of the hazards which are associated with the unit operations and equipment.

The process of determining what, why and how things can happen.

Risk  Estimation:  Determination  of  the  frequency  at  which  the  identified hazards could be realized and give rise to specified levels of severity.

Risk Evaluation: Comparison of the risk estimated with criteria in order to decide whether the risk is acceptable or whether the unit operations and/or equipment design must be modified in order to reduce the risk.

Risk Reduction Option Analysis: The final step of risk assessment is the process of identifying, selecting and modifying design changes which might reduce the overall risk from unit operations and equipment.

Residual Risk: The remaining level of risk after all actions have been taken to reduce the probability and consequence of risk.

Risk Factor: The individual elements which comprise and influence the likelihood of a certain event occurring, e. g.

the frequency and duration of the exposure of persons to the hazard;

the probability of occurrence of a hazardous event;

the technical and human possibilities to avoid or limit the harm (e. g. awareness of risks, reduced speed, emergency stop equipment, enabling device).

Risk   Management:  The  systematic  application  of  management  policies, procedures and practices to the tasks of identifying, analysing, monitoring and controlling risk.

Fatal Accident Rate: Number of fatalities per 100 million hours of exposure, interpreted for workers as the number of deaths per 1000 people involved in an activity during the working lifetime of 105 hours.

4.  Aspects on how to influence explosion risks

In principle, an explosion can take place if a number of conditions are simultaneously satisfied. These conditions are dealt with by the ATEX 100a Directive which defines“explosive atmospheres” as:

Mixture with air, under atmospheric conditions, of flammable substances in the form of gases, vapours, mists or dusts in which, after ignition has occured, combustion spreads to the entire unburned mixture.

Consequently, any assessment of explosion risks shall be based on

-      the likelihood that explosive atmospheres will occur and their persistence,

-      the likelihood that ignition sources will be present and become effective,

-      the scale of the anticipated effects.

In this respect the following items are of particular importance:

design and construction of ATEX products substances used

processes

possible interactions

To help visualise what is going on, a generic fault tree of accident causation is provided (figure one).

It should encourage the analyst at a very early stage to speculate how a particular situation could arise or what may ensue from such a situation and hence identify causes or outcomes of undesired events.

Damage/

injuries

and

Explosion           Failed mitigation

and

Ignition                                            Failed suppression

and

Explosive atmosphere either pre-existing

or produced

or

Ignition source

or

 

 

 

 

 

 

normal

operation

 

abnormal

operation

           

 

normal operation

mal- function

rare malfunction

Figure one: Generic Fault Tree of Accident Causation

Before starting the analysis the following aspects need to be considered when establishing elements of risk:

-      Persons exposed

-      Type, frequency and duration of exposure

-      Human factors

-      Reliability of safety functions

-      Possibility to defeat or circumvent safety measures

Persons exposed

Risk estimation shall take into account all persons exposed to the hazards. This includes operators and other persons for whom it is reasonably foreseeable that they could be affected by the explosion event.

Type, frequency and duration of exposure

The estimation of the exposure to the hazard under consideration requires analysis of and shall account for all modes of operation and methods of working. In particular this affects the need for cleaning, fault finding and maintenance.

The risk estimation shall account for situations when it is necessary to suspend safety functions (e. g. during maintenance).

Human factors

Human factors can affect risk and shall be taken into account in the risk estimation. This may include some of the following aspects:

interaction of persons with the ATEX products;

interaction between persons;

psychological aspects; (e. g. resistance to incentives not to deviate from prescribed and necessary safe working practices.)

design of the products in relation to ergonomic principles;

capacity of persons to be aware of risks in a given situation depending on their training, experience and ability.

Training, experience and ability can affect the risk, however none of these factors are to be used as a substitute for hazard elimination, risk reduction by design or safeguarding where these measures can be implemented.

Reliability of safety functions

Risk estimation shall take account of the reliability of components and systems. Those identified as part of safety critical functions need special attention. Estimation shall:

identify the circumstances which can result in harm (e. g. component failure, power failure, electrical disturbance);

when appropriate use quantitative methods to compare alternative safety measures;

provide information to allow the selection of appropriate safety functions, components and devices.

When more than one safety related device contribute towards a safety function, the selection of these devices shall be consistent in terms of reliability and performance.

When safety measures include work organisation, correct behaviour, attention, application of personal protective equipment, skill or training, the relatively low reliability of such measures as compared to proven technical measures shall be taken into account in the risk estimation, and shall be considered when re- estimating the risk during risk reduction option analysis.

Possibility to defeat or circumvent safety measures

Risk estimation shall take account for the possibility to defeat or circumvent safety measures, whether, for example:

the safety measure slows down production, or interferes with any other activities or a user’s preferred way of working;

the safety measure is difficult to use;

persons other than the operator are involved (e. g. cleaning, maintenance)

Risk estimation shall consider whether the safety measures can be maintained in the condition necessary to provide the required level of protection.

5. Risk Assessment Procedure

A Risk assessment methodology should consider all risk factors including unexpected parameters. The methodology needs to answer the following basic questions:

What do we know? What is the risk?

Do we have an incident waiting to happen? What action can we take?

What can go wrong? What are the potential consequences? How likely is it to happen?

What is the chain of events which could lead to harm?

Can we tolerate the potential consequences at the estimated likelihood? What are the benefits and costs of alternative technologies?

For the purpose of this standard risk assessment comprises in principle five steps including the determination of intended use (figure two):

-      Determination of intended use (Functional / State-Analysis)

-      Identification of hazards, hazardous situations and hazardous events

-      Risk estimation of consequences / likelihood

-      Risk evaluation

-      Risk reduction option analysis

Risk Assessment should follow the step-approach in that order of preference given.

The   first   three   steps  of   risk   assessment  (determination,  identification, estimation) are often referred to collectively as risk analysis.

Risk assessment is an iterative process. If, after risk has been evaluated, the decision is made that the risk needs to be reduced it is necessary to re-estimate the risk. A decision can then be made as to whether the measures taken have reduced the risk to an acceptable level. It is also essential to check that the measures used to reduce risk have not themselves introduced any new hazards. Therefore a feedback loop from Risk Reduction Option Analysis to Hazard Identification has to be made.

 

 

 

Risk Assessment Steps

 

 

Determination of intended use

Hazard identification

Risk analysis

Risk assessment

Risk estimation of consequences /

likelihood

Risk evaluation

Risk reduction option analysis

Figure two: – Fundamental Steps of Risk Assessment

5.1  Determination of intended use

The step-approach needs to be carried out with an understanding of the functioning of the equipment and/or unit operations and the way in which an incident or an accident develops.

5.1.1 Description of the system

The first stage in assessing the risk of a system or piece of equipment is to determine its intended use. As the risk of an explosion comes from both the equipment itself and the products being handled, both the characteristics of the equipment and those of the product need to be documented.

5.1.1.1 Equipment characteristics

The characteristics of the equipment relevant to achieving its desired function should be described – this should include aspects relevant to it acting as an ignition  source  including  for  example  materials  of  construction  and  the formation of explosive atmospheres (see Annex I).

5.1.1.2 Product characteristics

The flammability and explosivity characteristics of the materials being handled should be listed (see Annex II).

5.1.2 Functional / State Analysis

For complex pieces of equipment it is an advantage to establish an Equipment / Process Flow Diagram in the light of a Functional / State-Analysis with the inclusion of energy levels (i. e. temperatures, pressures etc.) for each phase of the equipment’s operation. Such a diagram helps the assessor to consider and/or to define the status of the materials being handled and the availability of equipment itself being available (figure three).

In addition, such a flow diagram not only helps to define the intended use but can also be used as a key part of the iterative risk assessment process. It refers the ATEX product characteristics to energies involved and/or the operating state as well as the physical state of the substance. Following this approach there are linkages depending on function and / or depending on effects between the input and the output within such a risk assessment process. Thus the analyst is able to determine what, why and how things can happen, especially when dealing with complete machines or more complex products.

The diagram is based on the fact, that any ATEX product has limits to its functionality and to its use, especially the intended use, its lifetime and space it occupies (configuration).

physical state of the substance

solid, grains, dusty, gaseous, liquid, emulsion, paste-like

unit operations

grinding, mixing, fluidizing, spraying, drying, evacuating, storing, transporting

  energies/

operating state

dynamics, statics, pressure, temperature

input

solid     S1 dusty   S2 liquid          S3

paste-like   S4

A                           E1  heating

V1

B                           E2  cooling

V2

E3

V3

D                           E4

Vn

Sn                           XYZ                         En

output

 

S: physical state of  the substance        A...XYZ: unit operations

E: energy/operating state

V: linkage (depending on function/depending on effect)

Figure three: Functional Analysis of Unit Operations

These limits form part of constituent elements or parameters which need to be taken into account in any phase of the Functional/State-Analysis. These constituent elements can be used to evaluate for example,

·   phases of equipment life

·   limits in terms of use, time, space

·   accurate definition of the function

·   selection of material used to construct

·   combustion properties

When defining these limits, the following items have an important impact, for example, in terms of use, time and space:

Intended use:

product, capacity, load rate of utilisation, foreseeable misuse

Life time:

abrasion, corrosion, parameters of process like ageing by temperature, pressure, vibration, characteristics of substances, maintenance, change of use, change of environment;

Configuration:

range of movement, space requirement, location, volume, confinement, weight, kind of interconnections

5.2  Identification of hazards, hazardous situations and hazardous events

There is rarely, if ever, a single cause of a hazardous situation or hazardous event. Although the immediate cause may be a simple hardware failure or operator error, other events will have also occured which assist the development of the accident. Such events include undetected failure of protective systems, ergonomic problems or an organisation in which safety is not given priority.

In many ways, hazard identification is the most important part of any risk assessment. However in order to successfully carry out this step the previous step must have accurately defined the equipment in sufficient detail. Once a hazard has been identified, the design can be changed to minimise it, whether or not the degree of risk has been estimated; unless the hazard is recognized it cannot be addressed in the design. A full understanding of its intended use and foreseeable misuse is also of prime importance during this step.

A project or a process has an acceptably safe design when one judges that adequate preventive or protective measures have been taken. The term

“adequate measures”, refers to generally accepted safety, engineering, scientific, production, operational, and maintenance procedures in relation to the risks involved. The  risks considered may be of harm to people, or cause damage to the plant or environment.

The system should be examined to determine which ignition sources are present. Table 2a contains a list of possible ignition sources provided in EN 1127. Where such an ignition source can occur in the system this should be noted in the

‘Relevant’ column of the table. For example if there are no Ultrasonic

discharges possible in the system then a ‘No’ would be entered in the ‘Relevant’ column. The relevant individual ignition sources should then be considered with respect to the potentially explosive atmospheres present and where appropriate a decision made as to whether they are significant to the complete system and

must be considered in the risk assessment. For example if electrostatic brush discharges are possible in the system but there are no explosible gas or vapour atmospheres present and the ignition energy of the explosible dust atmosphere being handled is 100 mJ then a ‘Yes’ would be entered in the ‘Relevant’ column and ‘No – MIE dust cloud 100 mJ’ would be entered in the ‘Significant’

column.

The main aim of hazard identification is that all possible hazards are found and none are missed. This may be facilitated by the use of more than one method and/or technique. The main output from the hazard identification stage is a numbered listing of hazardous events recorded as in table 2b, which could result from the unit operations and equipment involved as an input to the risk estimation stage.

 

Ignition sources

Possible

Relevant

(Yes/No)

Significant

(include reason)

Hot surface

 

 

flames and hot gases (including hot

particles)

 

 

Mechanically generated sparks

 

 

Electrical apparatus

 

 

Stray electric currents, cathodic

corrosion protection

 

 

Static electricity:

 

 

Corona discharges

 

 

Brush discharges

 

 

Propagating brush discharges

 

 

Cone discharges

 

 

Spark discharges

 

 

Lightning

 

 

Radio frequency (RF)

electromagnetic waves from

104 Hz to 3 x 1012 Hz

 

 

Electromagnetic waves from 3 x

1011 Hz to e x 1015 Hz

 

 

Ionizing radiation

 

 

Ultrasonics

 

 

Adiabatic compression and shock

waves

 

 

Exothermic reactions, including

self-ignition of dusts

 

 

Table 2a: List of Ignition Sources

25

 

Explosive Atmosphere

Ignition Source

 

 

 

Ref.

 

 

Type

Frequency

of occurence or

release

 

 

Location

 

 

Type

 

 

Cause

 

 

Likelihood

Effective- ness of

ignition sources

 

 

 

1

Mixture with air of flammable hexane vapour

for a short period only at the end of the filling

outside filling manhole

stirrer motor surface

overload of the motor

During malfunction

High

as surface temperature

> ignition temperature

 

 

2

Cloud of

explosible sugar dust

Present

frequently in normal operation

inside elevator

housing

Friction

sparks in bucket elevator

Baskets

rubbing on housing

Occasionally

in normal operation

Low

due to slow bucket speed

etc.

Table 2b: Record of Hazard Identification

The hazard identification should analyse the system to identify all possible occurrences of a potentially explosive atmospheres. the type of explosive atmosphere which could occur should be recorded in the ‘Type’ column of the table. The operation which causes its occurrence and an indication of the frequency or when it will occur is recorded in the ‘Frequency of occurrence or release’ column while the location where it occurs in the system is recorded in the ‘Location’ column. Similarly any significant ignition source which could cause the ignition of the explosive atmosphere should be entered in the corresponding ‘Type’ column together with the cause and likelihood of occurrence. Finally the effectiveness of the ignition source in causing ignition of the explosive atmosphere (ranked as high, medium, low) together with the reason is entered in the final column.

The likelihood of occurrence of the ignition source can be used as a means to determine the equipment category for the final classification of the equipment in terms of the ATEX 100a Directive.

Where the risk assessment of a protective system is to be carried out the risk assessment has to include the identification and possible consequences of faults in the operation of the protective system. The error types from HHEA techniques described in Annex V could facilitate this exercise. This should be carried out in addition to the hazard identification procedure outlined above to determine the possibility of the protective system causing ignition of the explosive atmosphere. The results of this assessment should be recorded in a table as follows:

Ref.

Deviation from intended operation

Possible reason

Consequence

1

No opening at defined pressure

Wrong spring mechanism

Overpressure to high

2

No opening at defined pressure

Jammed spring mechanism

Overpressureto high

etc.

 

 

 

There might be subsidiary outputs from the hazard identification, for example, a list of possible protective measures against the hazards which have been identified. These lists can be used also in the risk evaluation and risk reduction 

steps of the risk assessment.

Identification shall always be carried out for each hazard, hazardous situation and hazardous event.

In the assessment of the combustion properties and the likelihood of occurrence of a hazardous explosive atmosphere logic diagrams are useful tools. They ask questions relating to the materials and substances processed, used or released by equipment.

Safety data always plays an important role in this context, for example, flammability limits or relevant data characterizing the behaviour of the explosive atmosphere (figures four and five).

IS MATERIAL HANDLED POTENTIALLY EXPLO SIBLE ?

YE S

NO

DETERMINE FLA SH POINT (L) OR FLAMMABILITY LIMIT S (G)

IS FLAME PROPAGATION OBSERVED ?

YE S

CONSIDER GAS EXPLO SION POSSIBLE

NO

ARE THERE HAZARDS BECAUSE OF PROCESS CONDITION S ? CONSIDER T ,P,etc

NO

YE S

IS A BASIS FOR SAFETY PO SSIBLE ? EXAMINE POSSIBLE BASIS OF SAFETY FOR EACH UNIT AND IT S INTERACTION WITH THE RE ST OF SYSTEM

NO         MODIFY THE DE SIGN OF THE PROCESS

DETERMINE FLA SH POINT (L) OR FLAMMABILITY LIMIT S (G) AT P ROCESS CONDITION S

YE S

PERFORM NECESSARY BACK UP WORK TO ACHIEVE BASIS OF SAFETY

IS FLAME PROPAGATION OBSERVED ?

YE S

NO

NO GAS EXPLO SION HAZARD

WRITE BA SIS OF SAFETY FOR DE SIGN AND OPERATION

Figure four: Logic diagram for testing and design to identify gas explosion hazards

IS MATERIAL HANDLED POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIBLE  ?

YES

NO

VERTICAL TUBE TEST

CONSIDER DUST EXPLOSION  POSSIBLE

IS FLAME PROPAGATION OBSERVED ?

NO

YES

IS A BASIS FOR SAFETY POSSIBLE ? EXAMINE POSSIBLE BASIS OF SAFETY FOR EACH UNIT AND ITS INTERACTION  WITH THE REST OF SYSTEM

NO          MODIFY THE DESIGN OF THE PROCESS

IS DUST IN PROCESS DRIER OR FINER THAN TE STED ?

NO

YES

DRY DUST, SIEVE AND USE 63uM OR FINEST DUST

VERTICAL TUBE TEST

YES

PERFORM NECESSARY BACK UP WORK TO ACHIEVE BASIS OF SAFETY

IS FLAME PROPAGATION

NO                OBSERVED ?

 

YES

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TE ST DUST IN 20L SPHERE (11) USING 2KJ IGNITION SOURCE OR 1m³ VESSEL WITH 10 KJ IGNITION SOURCE

 

 

IS PRESSURE RISE GREATER THAN 0,5 BAR G FOR DUST CONCENTRATIONS  ACROSS EXPLOSIBLE RANGE ?

 

 

 

 

YES

 

 

 

NO

 

 

 

IS PROCESS ABOVE

110°C ?

IS DUST TO BE SUBJECTED TO TEMPERATURES GREATER THAN 110°C ?

 

 

 

 

YES

 

 

FURNANCE  TEST AT 800°C (OR AT TEMP OF PROCESS WITH LOCALISED IGNITION SOURCE)

 

 

 

NO

 

 

WRITE BASIS OF SAFETY FOR DESIGN AND OPERATION

 

 

NO DUST EXPLOSION HAZARD

 

 

IS FLAME PROPAGATION

NO                          OBSERVED ?

 

 

YES

 

 

 

Figure five: Logic Diagram for testing and design to identify dust explosion hazards

 

 

 

5.3   Risk Estimation

 

 

In principle, Risk Estimation shall be carried out for each explosion hazard or every hazardous event in turn by determining the elements of risk (see definition in chapter 3) after Hazard Identification. The risk associated with a particular situation or technical process is derived from a combination of these elements.

 

 

Risk in terms of explosion safety is fundamentally made up of two elements: the severity of the possible harm and the probability of occurrence of that harm.

The severity or consequence of an explosion can often be adequately characterized however the probability of its occurrence is usually more difficult to quantify.

 

 

Risk is usually expressed in one of 3 ways:

1.  Qualitatively for example as high, medium, low, tolerable, intolerable, acceptable;

2.  Quantitatively by calculating the frequency or probability of some determined event occurring;

3.  Semi-quantitatively where elements of risk such as consequence, exposure and likelihood are given a numerical score which are then combined in some way to give a pseudo-quantitative value of risk which allows risks to be ranked one against another.

 

 

In many situations it is not possible to exactly determine all the factors that effect risk, in particular those which contribute to the likelihood of a specified event occuring. Thus risk is often expressed in a qualitative rather than a quantitative way.

 

 

Severity can be expressed as defined levels, one or more of which can result from each hazardous event. Thus in terms of injuries or damage to health or system damage severity can be expressed as follows (figure six):

 

 

catastrophic major

minor negligible

 

 

In order to estimate the frequency of each severity level a screening technique can first be applied to determine the probability of each hazardous event in turn.

 

 

 

The frequency of occurrence can be qualitatively expressed as:

 

 

-+     frequent

-+     probable

-+     occasional

-+     remote

-+     improbable

 

 

The definitions of the different severity levels and frequencies are given in figure six.

The linkage between severity levels on the one side and the frequency of their occurrence on the other leads to the matrix shown in figure six. The corresponding points in this matrix are allocated to the risk levels A, B, C, and

D.

 

 

The risk levels represent a ranking of the risk which enables an evaluation of what further actions are needed if any.

 

 

Thus:

 

 

-+     risk level A:                             High risk level

 

 

-+     risk level B:

 

 

-+     risk level C:

 

 

-+     risk level D:                             Low risk level

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SEVERITY

Description

 

 

Mishap Definition

CATASTROPHIC

 

MAJOR MINOR

NEGLIGIBLE

Death or system loss.

 

Severe injury, severe occupational illness, or major system damage.

 

Minor injury, minor occupational illness, or minor system damage.

 

Less than minor injury, occupational illness, or system damage.

 

 

FREQUENCY

Description

 

Specific Individual Item

 

Inventory

FREQUENT

 

PROBABLE OCCASIONAL REMOTE IMPROBABLE

Likely to occur frequently

 

Will occur several times in life of an item

 

Likely to occur sometime in life of an item

 

Unlikely but possible to occur in life of an item

 

So unlikely, it can be assumed occurence may not be experienced

Continuously experienced

 

Will occur frequently

 

 

 

Will occur several times

 

 

 

Unlikely but can reasonably be expected to occur

 

Unlikely to occur, but possible

 

RISK LEVELS

 

 

Frequency

 

of Occurrence

Severity

Catastrophic

Major

Minor

Negligible

Frequent

A                            A                            A

C

 

C

Probable

A                            A

B

 

B

Occasional

A A

B

 

B

D

 

D D

Remote

C

Improbable

B

C                            C

 

 

 

Figure six: Frequency-Severity Matrix relating to risk levels

 

 

 

5.4  Risk Evaluation

 

 

 

 

 

Following the estimation of the risk, Risk Evaluation shall be carried out to determine if Risk Reduction is required or whether safety has been achieved.

 

 

It is evident that if the risk estimation results in a risk level of A, the risk is so high as to be intolerable and additional risk reduction measures are required. Similarly a risk level of D can be considered to be acceptable and no further risk reduction is required.

 

 

Thus the risk can be described either as

 

 

Intolerable: If the risk falls into this category then appropriate safety measures must be taken to reduce the risk.

or as

 

 

Acceptable: If the risk falls into this category then no Risk Reduction is required and the Risk Assessment is complete.

 

 

Risk levels B and C are intermediate levels and will normally require some form of risk reduction measures to make the risk acceptable. However, the degree of these measures will be smaller and in the case of a risk level C, organisational risk reduction measues will often be sufficient.

 

 

Alternatively the process of Risk Evaluation can be carried out by comparing the explosion risks associated with equipment and unit operations with those of similar equipment. In this case it is essential that the following are comparable:

 

 

-      hazards and elements of risk

 

 

-      type of equipment, its technology and operational limits

 

 

-      intended use and the conditions of use

 

 

 

The application of the comparison method does not preclude the need for conducting a Risk Assessment for the specific conditions of use.

 

 

 

 

 

5.5  Risk Reduction Option Analysis

 

 

Risk can seldom be reduced to zero in practice except by eliminating the activities. However, risks can often be reduced further in practice.

 

 

Options which address the hazardous events that make the greatest contributions to the total risk have the greatest potential to reduce risk. Effectiveness in reducing risk always starts with changes to the design concept, i. e. inherently safe design.

 

 

Once the risk has been estimated and evaluated the step of risk reduction option analysis shall lead to the final decision whether or not the solution found reduces the risk to an acceptable level. This decision includes both the technological and economical point of view based on an appropriate classification of equipment category. If the decision is that the risk has not been reduced to an acceptable level then the iterative process has to be done again after amending the safety concept.

 

 

There are many factors to take into account when analysing the options for risk reduction. The most important is whether the amount of risk reduction is sufficient to reduce the risk to tolerable levels. The manufacturer or user may need to reconsider how much the safety of a design improves, if a particular safety feature is included. It is important during this assessment to properly take into account the effectiveness of the various options. This is in terms of the hierarchy given in the Essential Health and Safety Requirement 1.1.2, principles of safety integration, of the Machinery Directive. In general the removal of a hazard is more effective than safeguarding it, which in turn is more effective than  use  of  personal  protective  equipment  or  safe  systems  of  work.  The reliability of any safeguard also needs to be taken into account as discussed earlier in section 4, in particular any incentives for them to be defeated or circumvented. The expected lifetime of the safeguard must also match that of the equipment and/or provision may need to be made for the monitoring and replacement of components which will wear out.

 

 

It is obviously also important to compare the cost effectiveness of the various options. In doing so the following issues, which may also have implications in terms of providing incentives to defeat a safeguard, need to be considered. Changes to:

- overall capital cost,

- productivity,

- energy efficiency,

- maintenance costs

- other operational costs.

 

 

 

Note that some options may actually have beneficial effects on some of these. A more reliable piece of equipment for example often has lower maintenance and operational costs as well as being more productive.

 

 

Other issues which may be relevant when comparing one option with another are:

 

 

Legislative or code of practice requirements, if a particular option is required by the law then a very strong case would be needed to select an alternative. Codes of practice and industry guidance are also often invaluable sources of information about the most effective options for reducing specific risks. Expected lifetime of the hazard, in the situation where a hazard may only exist for a short period, a safeguard designed to exist continuously may be inappropriate.

 

 

In  many  cases,  it  is  unlikely that  any  one  risk  reduction option  will  be  a complete solution for a particular problem. Often Risk Assessment of Unit Operations  and  Equipment  will  benefit  substantially  by  a  combination  of options. In this context the step of Risk Reduction Option Analysis becomes subject to Risk Management (see definition in chapter 3).

 

 

It’s necessary to deal with residual risks after all measures have been taken to reduce the probability and consequence of a specific hazardous event. The residual risks are those against which risk reduction by design and safeguarding techniques are not – or not totally – effective.

 

 

The users must be informed about residual risks. Instructions and warnings shall, for example, prescribe the operating modes and procedures to overcome the relevant hazards.

 

 

It’s an advantage to produce a written plan in order to document how the chosen options shall be implemented.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

What potential sources does hazard quantification show to be present?

 

 

 

NO Is the equipment

connected?

 

 

Are hot surfaces present?

 

 

NO                           Are electrostatic discharges

a probability?

 

 

YES

 

 

YES

 

 

YES                NO

 

 

 

Can transport of ignition sources from one item of plant to another be prevented?

 

 

 

YES

 

Do standard tests show that process dusts will not ignite on these surfaces

 

 

YES

 

 

Is frictional heating or mechanical spark generation a probability?

 

 

NO

NO

 

Perform the MIE test

 

 

YES                NO

 

 

Consider hazards from conductors

 

 

Consider hazards from non-conductors

 

 

 

 

Design earthing

 

 

Bulk powder discharge Lightning cloud discharge

Incendivity of sparks from plastics etc. Earthing systems Design of process

 

 

Examine other options or combinations

 

 

 

NO                 Can electrostatic hazard be excluded?

 

 

 

YES

 

 

 

 

 

 

YES

 

 

 

 

 

Does friction involve

Al, Mg, or Ti?

 

 

be excluded?                              NO

 

YES

 

 

 

NO        Can hazardous rubbing friction or mechanical spark generation be

avoided?

 

 

YES

 

 

 

 

YES

 

Is thermal decomposition a probability?

NO

 

 

 

 

Do standard tests show that process NO        temperatures will not result in self- accelerated thermal reaction in dust

deposits? YES

NO

 

 

 

YES

 

 

 

 

 

YES

 

 

 

 

Does plant equipment (electrics, Welding Flame, Tools etc) present an ignition hazard?

 

NO

 

 

 

Can plant design and safety procedures exclude possibility of ignition from equipment and maintenance?

 

 

 

YES

 

 

 

Exclusion of ignition sources

 

 

Basis for safety to be defined write basis of safety

 

 

 

Figure seven: Logic diagram for minimizing of ignition sources

 

 

 

6.  Methods and/or techniques that could favourably be applied

 

 

There is no golden rule as to which method and / or technique ought to be adopted.   There   are   many   possible   methods   and/or   techniques   for   risk assessment, especially for hazard identification. A good hazard identification technique has the following attributes:

-      it is systematic, i. e. it guides the users so that all parts of the system, all phases of use and all possible hazards are considered:

-      it employs brainstorming;

 

 

In principle, the identification techniques fit into three family categories:

-       comparative methodology, e. g. checklists, codes

-       fundamental approach, e. g. HAZOP, FMEA

-       failure logic diagrams, e. g. Fault Tree Analysis, Event Tree Analysis

 

 

The comparative methodology relies on experience, whereas the fundamental methodology aims to discover all possible conditions and deviations in order to identify those which may be hazardous. The failure logic diagram approach identifies and structures combinations or sequences of occurrences with accident potential.

 

 

In general, methods and / or techniques can be classified as:

 

 

-      Qualitative: Both the input to the risk estimation in terms of categories for each unit operation and equipment and the output in terms of risk all consist of qualitative phrases such as “hazardous event is likely to occur”, “severe injuries”, “unacceptable risk”, “high risk”, “low risk” and so on.

 

 

-      Quantitative: The incident scenario is modelled in detail, for example using fault tree analysis and event tree analysis, so that estimates can be made, using any available data or experience of the frequency or probability of all possible events which affect the overall frequency of a defined hazardous event or consequence. The results can be directly compared with accident statistics in order to either validate the method, or to make decisions as to whether the risk is acceptable.

 

 

-      Semi-Quantitative: Input categories are combined numerically or diagrammatically to obtain a numerical (pseudo-quantitative) value of risk. These values are often then banded into categories which are defined qualitatively.

 

 

Figure eight reflects the typical considerations in selecting the type of analysis and depth of study.

 

 

 

In addition table 3 shows the objectives and attributes of each technique as an aid to selecting the most appropriate technique or techniques.

 

 

It should become clear that the limitations of one technique can be offset by the advantages of others.

By using more than one technique the possibility of overlooking any relevant hazards is minimised. However, the additional time employed in using more than one technique needs to be balanced against the increased confidence in the results.

 

 

Most techniques which contain criteria to enable risk to be evaluated cover both the risk estimation and evaluation step. Some go further and give recommen- dations for risk reduction.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

What is the phase of the system‘s development

 

 

 

What is the objective of the study

 

 

 

What type of system and hazard is being analysed?

 

 

 

What is the potential severity?

 

 

 

What level of resources is available?

 

 

 

What information is available about the system?

 

 

 

Will the study need to be updated in the future?

 

 

 

Are there regulatory or contractual requirements?

 

Conceptual Detailed design Upgrade

 

 

Selection of risk reduction measures Comparison to risk target Comparison between alternatives

 

 

Simple system Complex system Technological hazards

 

Large number of fatalities Single injury or fatality Environmental damage Economic loss

 

 

Limited time and expertise Extensive time and ability to acquire expertise

 

 

Conceptual design Detailed design Operational

 

 

 

One-time activity

On-going activity

 

 

 

No

Limited choices

No choices

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure eight: Typical Consideration in Selecting Type of Analysis and Depth of Study

 

 

 

 

 

 

Technique

 

Objective

Attributes

Checklists

to   measure   compliance

with standard procedures

 

 

usually   prepared   from prior experience;

 

 

generally   identify   com- mon hazards;

can   be   applied   to   all

stages of a project and to plant operations;

 

 

can be as detailed as necessary to satisfy the specific situation;

 

 

can highlight a lack of basic information or a situation that requires a more detailed evaluation.

Machinery/Equipment concept hazard analysis

 

 

Preliminary hazard analysis

to  identify  hazards  that

are inherent due to the design       concept       of

machinery / equipment

 

 

to be used early in the design stage to identify hazards and assess their criticality

an expert team applies a

series  of  key  words  to each   of   the   functional

parts  of  the  machine  /

equipment in order to facilitate brainstorming of possible hazards

 

 

the effectiveness of this technique is dependent on the skill and expertise of the persons involved and the preparation work (drawing, record sheets etc.)

Hazard Exposure

Index /

Category Rating

a means of rating risks by

the categories in which they fall in order to create prioritised groups of risk

 

 

to rate the relative acute health hazard potential to people in neighbouring plants or communities from possible chemical release incidents

a simple technique which

is consequence based and independent of the frequency of events

 

 

results in an index that is suited for use as a screening tool for more sophisticated process hazard analyses

Table 3: Objectives and Attributes of Techniques

 

 

 

 

Technique

 

 

Objective

 

 

Attributes

Hazardous human error analysis

 

 

Human reliability

to     go     systematically

through the operating procedures and to con- sider any human error which could lead to realisation of a hazard

 

 

deals with the impact of people on system perfor- mance and evaluates the influence

particularly      good      at

identifying hazards which could result from human error or from the presence of the operator

 

 

 

key tasks relating to the use of equipment need to be listed

Distribution Risk

Evaluation

identification  of  hazards

and risks associated with the distribution of products, by-products, purchased materials, solvents, catalysts, and modifiers

in-depth  qualitative  risk

assessment.

 

 

assessment is typically completed by a multi- functional team

 

 

the Risk Review Team looks at each movement and assesses potential exposure

Fault Tree Analysis

focuses on one particular

incident event and provides a technique for determining  causes  of that event

 

 

can be used as a qualitative tool to break down an incident into basic equipment failures and human errors

but can also be quantified if the base events are broken down into sufficient detail and data is available and used as part of a Quantified Risk Assessment (QRA)

graphic      model      that

displays the various combinations of equip- ment and human errors that   can   result   in   the event

 

 

the solution is a list of the sets of equipment and human errors that are sufficient to result in the incident event of interest

 

 

allows to focus preven- tive measures on basic causes to reduce the probability of an incident

 

Table 3: Objectives and Attributes of Techniques (continued)

 

 

 

 

Technique

 

 

Objective

 

 

Attributes

Concept safety and

Standards review

the review identifies the essential  health  and safety   requirements which are relevant to unit operations and equipment

 

 

identifies any relevant standard (national, inter- national, European)

 

 

to encourage inherently safe design, gain an appreciation of the likely hazards associated with the design

can be carried out by an individual rather than a team

 

 

 

 

 

can be used to ensure that the design is consistent with the published “state of the art” for that type of equipment at a very early stage  in  the  design process

Hazard and Operability

Study (HAZOP)

to identify the hazards in

a design as well as anticipate any operational

difficulties

will only identify causes of loss of containment not causes  of  ignition sources.

formal systematic critical

examination of the pro- cess,    engineering,    and

operating   intentions   of

new or existing facilities

 

 

a multidisciplinary team systematically  searches for  deviations  from design and operating intentions using a set of “guide words”

 

 

this technique can be applied to any equipment or activity whose design intention can be defined

Table 3: Objectives and Attributes of Techniques (continued)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Technique

 

 

Objective

 

 

Attributes

“What – If” Analysis

to consider the results of unexpected events that could produce adverse consequences

 

 

to understand of what is intended and the ability to mentally combine or synthesize possible devia- tions from the design intention which could cause  an  undesirable effect

 

 

Particularly good at iden- tifying             equipment   mal- functions   which    could lead to ignitions sources.

involves the examination of possible deviations from the design, con- struction modifiation, or operating intent

 

 

the review is divided into specific areas such as personal safety, process safety, etc.

 

 

a multidisciplinary team examines the process using “What-If”questions at each handling or processing step to determine the effect of equipment failure and operating errors

Failure      Mode      and

Effect Analysis (FMEA)

Can  be  used  to  analyse the ways in which equipment, particularly mechanical, electrical and electronic can fail.  It is particularly useful for looking  at  control systems.

standard reliability engineering technique, usually used by a team

 

 

can  be  used  for  any system which can be broken down into components parts

 

 

can be very time-con- suming for complex systems

Common Mode Failure

Analysis

to   assess   whether   the

coincidental failure of a number of different parts or components within a system is possible

provides  information  on

the likely overall effect of coincidental failure with- in a system

 

Table 3: Objectives and Attributes of Techniques (continued)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Technique

 

 

Objective

 

 

Attributes

Consequence Analysis

to estimate the potential impact of an event on people, property or the environment

 

 

this event might be, for example, a flammable material release

variables,  such  as release scenario, phy- sical properties of the material, and atmos- pheric conditions, are used with mathematical models to calculate the potential impact, of the material as a function of distance  from  the release point

Event Tree Analysis

to     translate    different

initiating    events    into possible outcomes

a  hazard  identification

and frequency analysis technique  which employs inductive reasoning

Reliability Block Diagram

to  evaluate  the  overall

system reliability

a    frequency    analysis

technique that creates a model of the system and its redundancies

Delphi Technique

to      combine      expert opinions

a  means  that  may support frequency analysis, consequence modelling and / or risk estimation

Monte-Carlo simulation and other simulation technique

to evaluate variations in

input    conditions    and assumptions

a    frequency    analysis

technique which uses a model of the system for evaluating variations

Review of Historical Data

to     identify     potential

problem areas

a  hazard  identification

technique     that     can provide  an   input  into

frequency         analysis

based  on  accident  and reliability data etc.

 

Table 3: Objectives and Attributes of Techniques (continued)

 

 

 

Addressing the main fields to be analysed and to link them with the fundamental steps of risk assessment a simplified Risk Assessment Process could be helpful (figure five). Starting from “Function/Task/Intended Use” the main fields to be analysed are considered as:

-       Equipment characteristics

-       Operational Aspects and Influences

-       Human Factors and organisational Aspects

Then, the main fields to be analysed are each of them composed of the constituent elements dealt with in the corresponding annexes I to IV.

 

 

In addition to the constituent elements also dealt with in Chapter 5.1 there are many factors and/or relationships which could influence the risk and which need to be considered case by case. For example, to prevent dust explosions the thickness of deposits need to be dealt with.

 

 

The performance influencing factors are often subject to investigations by means of special methods and/or analysis techniques. The specific techniques all have characteristics which makes their application more appropriate in some circumstances than others. Being aware of this requisite the tables listed in Annexes I to IV offer methods and/or techniques that could favourably be applied. This allocation doesn’t imply any priority nor any ranking.

 

 

Sometimes the constituent elements of the different main fields to be analysed must be considered in combination with each other. For example, the “phases of equipment life” needs to be assessed taking into account the “selection of material”. In this respect, the analyst should be aware that there are cross- references between the main fields to be analysed.

 

 

Many of the methods/techniques used require information to be gathered from different  sources  and  by  different  individuals.  Often  a  team  approach  is necessary when analysing the information particularly if complex structures are being assessed.

 

 

A description of techniques is listed in Annex VIII which proved to be efficient in mechanical electrotechnical and chemical engineering. They are likely to be favourably applied to equipment for use in explosive atmospheres in a modified way. Some of the techniques provide suitable tables for recording the results of the analysis, other require diagrams to be drawn and examples are given of what these should look like.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Function / Task / Intended Use

Chapter 5.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Equipment

Characteristics

 

Operational Aspects and Influences

 

Human Factors and organisational Aspects

 

 

 

Annex I

 

Phases of Equipment

Life

Limits of Equipment

Accurate Definitions of the Function

Identification of Operating Process including Operating State, Energy, Characteristics, physical Conditions etc.

 

Annex II

 

Selection of Material

Combustion

Properties

Presence of Ignition

Sources

Undesired Events, Malfunctions

Releases, Persons and Places exposed

Investigating

Process Parameters

 

Annex III

 

Physiological / psychological Capacity

Interaction between

Persons, ATEX- Products and Process

Ergonomic Effects

Training, Communication

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hazard Identification                         Chapter 5.2

Risk Estimation                                  Chapter 5.3

Risk Evaluation                                  Chapter 5.4

Methods given in Annex V

 

 

 

 

 

Risk Reduction

Options

 

 

SAFETY

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure nine:     SIMPLIFIED RISK ASSESSMENT PROCESS

- Iterative Process to achieve Safety -

 

 

 

 

 

Annex I: Equipment characteristics

 

 

Constituent Elements / Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

 

Phases of equipment life construction

transport and commissioning intended use

de-commissioning, dismantling, disposal

 

 

 

Limits of equipment / unit operations use limits

space limits time limits

 

Accurate definitions function

task

intended use normal operation energy / power flow

material / substances handled signal / information processed performance levels

 

 

assembly, installation, adjustment setting,

teaching / programming, operation, cleaning, fault

finding, maintenance;

 

external effets: humidity, vibrations, contaminations, extraneous voltages;

 

surrounding area conditions:

severe operating conditions, rough handling, changing environmental conditions; physical geometry and arrangements;

 

actions to be performed within proper time, in correct order and completely;

energy balance, buffer timing

exposure of other persons to the process / hazards;

 

safe functioning for the intended purpose including process change-over;

 

Functional / State – Analysis:

to define the status of the materials being handled and the equiment itself being available

 

A complex function / task is broken down into a number of more simple sub-tasks. Each sub- task may then be broken down into further sub- tasks. This process is continued until the sub- tasks reach the level of individual tasks.

 

Additional Hazard Identification

Techniques:

-       checklists

-       Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP)

-       Concept Safety Review

-       Preliminary Hazard and Consequence

Analysis

 

 

 

 

Annex I: Equipment characteristics

 

 

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements / Parameter

to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships

which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

 

Identification of operating process including those conditions which are not considered to be part of normal operation, e. g.

standstill start-up breakdown

releases caused by accidents failures which involve repair shut-down

 

 

Operating state

energy (heat, temperature, pressure, cold) characteristics (mixing, spraying, transporting etc.),

physical condition of the substance (solid, grained, dusty etc.)

 

Reliability Block Diagram

 

 

 

Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Annex I: Equipment characteristics

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

Construction of equipment with due regard to technological knowledge of explosion protection and quality assurance.

 

Quality objectives and the organizational structure, responsibilities and powers of the management

with regard to product quality;

 

Establishing and updating of technical documentation, such as description of the equipment, conceptual design and manufacturing drawings, results of design calculations made;

 

Monitoring the effective operation of a quality system;

 

To carry out periodically audits;

 

 

Application of moduls laid down in Directive

94/9/EC whereby the manufacturer ensures

that the equipment satisfy the requirements of the Directive:

-       internal control of production

-       product quality assurance

-       conformity to type

-       product verification

-       production quality assurance

 

combined with specific technology related to explosion prevention and protection

 

 

 

Annex II: Operational aspects and influences

 

 

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

Selection of material used to construct equipment, protective systems and

components

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Combustion properties taking into account materials contact or mixing with the air

 

(see Logic Diagrams for Testing and

Design in Annex V)

material must not trigger off an explosion, taking into account foreseeable operational stresses,

physical and thermodynamic properties, flammability, reactivity, characteristics,

corrosivity, structural strength;

 

 

it must not be possible for a reaction;

to take place between the materials used and the constituents of the potentially explosive atmosphere;

 

predictable changes in material's characteristics and their compatibility in combination with other materials will not lead to a reduction in the protection afforded;

 

substance's burning behaviour, e. g. flash point, explosion limits, limiting oxygen concentration;

 

explosion behaviour, e. g. maximum explosion pressure, maximum rate of explosion pressure rise, maximum experimental safe gap;

Concept Hazard Analysis

 

is particularly good at identifying hazards that are inherent due to the design concept of unit operations and equipment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Relevant Data Review

providing appropriate information relating to the integrity and safety of products involved

 

 

 

 

Annex II: Operational aspects and influences

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter

to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships

which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

Presence of potential

ignition sources capable of igniting the atmosphere

 

taking discrete items and their possible interactions into consideration

 

(see Logic Diagram for exclusion of ignition sources in Annex VI)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Undesired events:

Dangerous disturbances, operating faults,

overloading of equipment and unit operations

Hazards arising from different ignition sources

becoming effective such as sparks, flames, electric arcs, high surface temperatures, acoustic energy, optical radiation, electromagnetic waves and other ignition sources;

 

Forming of products which promote the ignition of the original atmospheres;

 

Temperature increases due to chemical reactions, moving parts, poor lubrication, ingress of foreign bodies etc.;

Ignition caused by portable equipment, or outside

influences;

 

Beside normal operation dangerous events as a result of malfunctions and incidents;

 

Consideration by means of integrated measurement, regulation and control devices (cut- off switches, limits, monitors etc.)

Hazard and Operability

Study (HAZOP)

for identifying those process variables which

can lead to hazards and/or operability problems

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Failure Mode and Effect

Analysis (FMEA)

to go through the system component by

component asking questions about the failure mode and it's cause and effects

 

 

 

 

Annex II: Operational aspects and influences

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

Manufacturing process including access to the inspection, testing and storage premises.

 

Quality records, such as inspection reports and test data, calibration data, reports on the qualifications of the personnel concerned;

 

Examinations, verifications and tests to be carried out relating to the anti-explosive protection aspects and its efficacy;

Professional integrity and technical competence of inspection staff.

 

To possess the necessary facilities for performing properly the administrative and technical tasks connected with verification and quality assurance;

 

 

Standards Review

 

Design details and test results are compared with the requirements of standards to ensure that the design and the manufacturing process are consistent with the published "state-of-the- art" for that type of product,

 

 

 

 

Annex II: Operational aspects and influences

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

release of flammable gases or dusts relating to the system

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

places exposed to hazardous explosive atmosphere

to employ, wherever possible, enclosed structures for avoiding the release of flammable gases or

dusts;

 

openings or non-tight joints with view to developing gases or dusts (safe opening);

 

escapes of flammable materials during filling or draining.

 

explosive atmosphere to occur in such quantities as to require special precautions;

 

cleaning of equipment and protective systems;

 

thickness of deposit to prevent a heat build up on surfaces;

Event Tree Analysis

 

to analyse the consequences of the top event of a fault tree (e. g. an Event Tree for Flammable Release)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Classification of hazardous plants

to determine the extent of measures, the

hazardous places are classified into zones based on the frequency and duration of occurance of a hazardous explosive atmosphere

 

 

 

 

Annex II: Operational aspects and influences

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

elimination or minimization of dangerous events by investigating process parameters

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

maintenance activities

coincidence of an explosive atmosphere and the effective ignition source;

 

substitution or reduction of amount of substances capable of forming explosive atmospheres;

 

reliance on the automated process control systems to insure the safe operation

 

 

 

diagnosis of underlying failure;

 

preparation required for repair;

 

checks to be required after maintenance;

 

normal operation to be restored.

What–If-Analysis

supplemented by check-lists of questions to

ask about specific items of unit operations and equipment (e.g. blockages, partial failures)

 

 

 

Fault Tree Analysis

to identify the individual events and the logic

which links them in order to realise a hazard.

 

Maintenance Analysis

to allow maintenance strategy and procedures

to be optimised for safety, availability and efficacy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Annex III: Human factors and organisational aspects

 

 

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements/Parameter

to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships

which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

human performance shaping factors (external/internal)

 

lack of communication, training,

inadequate management of change procedures, organisational preconditions (hierarchies), technical predictions physiological/psychological capacity,

fitness, willingness,resources, interaction between persons/  with the equipment

 

Task Analysis

to allow complex tasks to be analysed in detail

 

 

 

Human Reliability Analysis

to predict the frequency of human failure

supplemented by other techniques

 

human intervention

 

level of confidence in carrying out the required tasks without intentional or unintentional deviation

awareness of risks difficulty of tasks

design of the products in relation to ergonomic principles

 

Action Error Analysis

to form basis for quantitative analysis

 

 

 

 

Annex IV: Risk estimation and evaluation

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements / Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

Severity of the possible harm which can result from each hazardous event (fatality)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Probability of occurrence of the harm considered

 

Possibilities of avoiding or limiting harm

 

(see Frequency-Severity Matrix in Annex

VII)

 

 

nature of what is to be protected (persons, property, environment);

 

severity of injuries or damage to health

(reversible, irreversible, death);

 

extent of harm

(explosion behaviour, persons exposed)

 

type, frequency and duration of exposure

 

 

 

to detect failure sufficiently rapidly and accurately by appropriate technical means, such as safety devices, controlling devices, regulating devices;

 

to secure equipment/operations in the event of safety device failure;

 

the presence and reliability of protective systems provided;

 

human possibility of avoidance or limiting harm;

 

Failure Mode and

Effect Critically Analysis (FMECA)

 

 

by ranking the hazards arising from the failure mode identified in either a qualitative or a quantitative way.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Short Cut Risk Assessment

 

to obtain a measure of the risk on a quantitative scale based on a largely qualitative assessment of the risk.

 

 

 

Annex IV: Risk estimation and evaluation

 

 

 

 

 

 

Constituent Elements / Parameter to be considered as a screen

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Methods / Techniques following Annex V

that could favourably be applied

 

Risk for each severity level to be evaluated against corresponding criteria

 

 

values shown for the worst severity level;

 

tolerability of risk;

various injury compensation schemes; additional protective or safety measures; possibilities for any new hazards to be introduced

by the modification to the design;

 

to revisit the hazard identification step;

 

 

Comparison of risks

Based on specific conditions of use and

comparable technical targets

 

Supported by techniques, such as

MOSAR, FMECA and

Quantified Risk Assessment (QRA)

 

 

 

Annex V

 

List of Risk Assesssment Techniques

 

 

 

 

1.    Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP)......................................................... 59

 

2.    Fault Tree Analysis......................................................................................... 61

 

3.    Event Tree Analysis........................................................................................ 63

 

4.    Preliminary Hazard and Consequence Analsis.............................................. 64

 

5.    Quantified Risk Assessment (QRA)................................................................ 67

 

6.    Short Cut Risk Assessment............................................................................ 68

 

7.    Concept Safety Review...................................................................................70

 

8.    Concept Hazard Analysis................................................................................71

 

9.    Critical Examination of System Safety (CE)................................................... 72

 

10. Check-lists.......................................................................................................73

 

11. Standards (comparison of designs with known safety standards).................. 74

 

12. Sneak Analysis............................................................................................... 75

 

13. Task Analysis.................................................................................................. 76

 

14. Hazardous Human Error Analysis (HHEA)..................................................... 77

 

15. Human Reliability Analysis..............................................................................80

 

16. What-If? Analysis............................................................................................ 81

 

17. Reliability Block Diagram................................................................................ 83

 

18. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)...................................................... 85

 

19. Failure Mode and Effect Criticality Analysis (FMECA).................................... 86

 

20. Maintenance Analysis..................................................................................... 88

 

21. Structural Reliability Analysis.......................................................................... 89

 

22. Techniques based on Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic........................................89

 

23. DEFI method................................................................................................... 89

 

24. Delphi Technique............................................................................................ 90

 

25. Method Organised Systematic Analysis of Risks (MOSAR)........................... 90

 

26. Goal Oriented Failure Analysis (GOFA).......................................................... 91

 

 

 

1.  Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP)

 

 

 

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

 

 

Limitations: Qualitative technique. Very time-consuming and laborious for complex systems. Requires detailed design drawings. Guide words would need to be developed for explosive atmospheres applications.

 

 

 

Advantages: Systematic and comprehensive technique.

 

 

 

Description of technique: HAZOP is carried out by a team of usually 4-6 people including a trained leader (with safety and reliability experience) and those involved in the design and the operation of the process to be studied. A detailed Piping and Instrument (P&I) diagram of the plant is required for the HAZOP so that the design needs to be well-advanced but still capable of change at the time that the HAZOP is performed.

 

The team look at each line of the P&I in turn, and systematically apply a set of guide- words to each of a set of process variables. For a chemical process, the process variables would include: PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE, FLOW, REACTION, LEVEL, COMPOSITION. Typical guide-words are NO/NOT/NONE, MORE, LESS, PART, REVERSE, OTHER THAN, AS WELL, SOONER, LATER. For each combination of process variable and guide-word, the team ask whether this can occur, whether it would be a hazard (or an operability problem) if it did, and, if so, what protects against it happening and is the level of protection sufficient. This is a very detailed and time-consuming process. Note that operability problems are also potential safety problems because the operator will find a way around the problem, probably in a way that the designer did not intend.

 

Records are kept of the HAZOP and computerised systems for doing this are available. The essential records are a list of agreed actions to sort out problems which have been identified. A system is required for ensuring that these actions are carried out, and the design modified as necessary. HAZOP review meetings are one way of achieving this. Attention can be given in these meetings to whether the modification has introduced further hazard or operability problems. It is also possible to keep records for lines which do not require action, and whether or not this is done tends to be a matter of individual company policy.

Different companies have developed different variations on the process variables and guide-words to suit their particular industry.

 

 

 

 

 

Products applicable to: complex items of process plant

 

 

 

This technique focuses on what happens to the substance being processed and how loss of control of process conditions can lead to undesirable events, in particular loss of containment. It is based around Piping and Instrumentation diagrams for process units or entire plants. Whilst it is invaluable for identifying process parameters which can lead to loss of containment events it would need significant modification to enable the identification of ignition sources. We also consider it to be over complex for discrete items of equipment. If this technique is kept then it needs to be made clear that it will only identify the potential for the creation of an explosive atmosphere through loss of containment and will not identify ignition sources. It also needs to be pointed out (under limitations subheading) that those doing a HAZOP must be competent and trained in the technique for it to be used effectively.

 

 

 

2. Fault Tree Analysis

 

 

Purpose: Identifying the individual events and the logic which links them in order to realise a hazard (top event). Can be used to predict frequency of the top event if quantitative data is available.

 

Limitations: Time-consuming for complex systems. Training is required in the technique otherwise errors in the logic can easily be made. Requires data for all the separate events eg component failure rates, human error, probability of exposure, fractional dead time of protective systems etc.

 

Advantages: Quantitative technique. It is the only technique available for predicting hazard frequency for novel systems and also proves useful for complex systems.

 

Description of technique: A fault tree is a method by which a particular undesired system failure mode can be expressed in terms of component failure modes and operator actions. The fault tree would set out the logic for all the ways in which this could occur. This is recorded on a fault tree diagram.

 

A fault tree diagram contains two basic elements: "gates" and "events". Gates allow the passage of fault logic up the tree and show the relationships between events which are needed to cause the occurrence of a higher event. The two main types of gate are AND and OR. An AND gate indicates that all the events entering the gate are required to occur at the same time in order to cause the higher event. An OR gate indicates that only one of the events entering the gate is required to cause the higher event. There are also a number of other types of gates which are required less frequently to represent logic.

 

Once the logic has been written down in a fault tree, the frequency of the top event can be calculated, given data on the frequencies/probabilities of events at the lowest level on the tree. Such frequencies/probabilities will usually apply to failure rates of electronic, electrical or mechanical components, and such data may be available from databases. The probability of failure of human operators to act as desired can also be predicted. Fault tree arithmetic, which has a basis in Boolean algebra can then be used to calculate the frequency of the top event. At any OR gate frequencies can be added together. At any AND gate, one frequency and any number of probabilities can be multiplied together (as a first order approximation). In evaluating a fault tree it is important to be clear about which data are frequencies (units of events per unit time) and which are probabilities (dimensionless). There are also specialist techniques for evaluating large and complex fault trees, such as the technique of minimum cut sets.

 

Fault tree analysis is usually best done by specialists as there are potential pitfalls. If the logic represented by the fault tree is incorrect then the calculated frequency will also be incorrect. It is also quite easy to get the algebra wrong specially if the occurence of a Common Mode Failure is not taken into account.

 

Products applicable to: discrete items, complete machinery, and assessing the reliability of protective systems.

 

 

 

Would  be  over  complex  and  prohibitively  time-consuming  for  more  complex machinery except when used, without quantification, to give a high level overview of the interaction between different components, functions. For a fuller description of this technique try IEC 61025: Fault Tree Analysis (FTA)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure A.1 - A Fault Tree Showing Failure of Power Supply

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3. Event Tree Analysis

 

Purpose: Consequence analysis and frequency prediction.

 

Limitations: Probabilities of different events leading from the hazard/top event of the fault tree are required for quantitative analysis.

 

Advantages: Relevant when a hazard (top event) can have multiple consequences.

 

Description of technique: Event trees can be used to analyse the consequences of the top event of a fault tree. The starting point of the event tree is therefore the finish point of a fault tree. It shows the probabilities of different scenarios, each with a different consequence, which could be generated by the earlier identified hazardous event. For example in the chemical industry a release of flammable gas could give rise to any of the following scenarios:

 

no ignition and safe dispersal, a jet fire, a flash fire, a vapour cloud explosion

 

An event tree is constructed from left to right. Each node is a possible event and there are two branches from each node: one in which the event did occur and one in which it did not. Probabilities can then be put onto the occurrence or non-occurence of each event. Simple arithmetic can then be used to determine the probability of each consequence.

 

Figure A.2 – An Event Tree for a Flammable Release

 

 

 

 

 

 

4. Preliminary Hazard and Consequence Analysis

 

Purpose: Identifying the underlying causes of a top event.

 

Limitations: Requires a knowledge of the major hazards and a team. Will not identify all the causes.

 

Advantages: Can be done at concept design stage so encourages inherently safe design. Systematically identifies the events and factors involved in an accident scenario   in   chronological   order   from   initiation   of   the   accident   to   its   final consequences. Facilitates the building of fault trees and event trees.

 

Description of technique: This analysis is done in two parts. The first part deals with the scenario from immediate causes through to the significant event. The study is conducted by a team using the first of the forms overleaf. One form would be used for each significant event already identified by a concept hazard analysis. In the chemical industry for example one such event would be vessel rupture. The columns for dangerous disturbance and hazardous disturbance could then be filled in. For vessel rupture they would be over-pressure and high-pressure respectively. The remaining three columns would then be filled in with all the events that could lead to the hazardous disturbance, the reasons why this could progress to an dangerous disturbances and how recovery failed allowing the realisation of the significant event. The second part is the analysis of the potential consequences through various levels of escalation using the second of the forms overleaf. For use with equipment the headings of the table would need some modification perhaps so that there were more levels available up to the significant event and less after for consequence analysis. The first form can then be used to build a fault tree and the second to build an event tree.

 

Products applicable to: Complete machines, complex products and interaction with protective systems

 

This is actually two related techniques Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA) and Preliminary Consequence Analysis (PCA). PHA is used as an aid to drawing a fault- tree for the loss of containment top event taking the results of a HAZOP as a starting point. If kept the same cautions given under HAZOP regarding the fact that only considering the loss of containment event are required. PCA is an aid for drawing an event tree starting with the loss of containment event. It is probably less helpful except in cases when there are a range of possible consequences and when taking into account the effects of suppression and protective systems. The manufacturer, particularly of discreet items, is unlikely to have the necessary information. It is therefore  only  appropriate  for  complex  equipment  where  there  is  close  liaison between user and manufacturer about the exact operating conditions under which is going to be used. Again this technique needs to be treated with some caution as it focuses on hazards essentially initiated by loss of containment (i. e. not normally occuring flammable atmospheres).

 

 

 

 

 

Plant:                              PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS SHEET                                       Date:

 

 

MPI:

 

 

 

IMMEDIATE CAUSES

INADEQUATE CONTROL

HAZARDOUS DISTURBANCE

INAD. EMERGENCY

CONTROL

DANGEROUS DISTURBANCE

FAILURE TO RECOVER

SIGNIFICANT EVENT

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RECOMMENDATIONS, COMMENTS, ACTIONS

 

 

 

 

 

Plant:                              PRELIMINARY CONSEQUENCES ANALYSIS SHEET                            Date:

 

 

MPI:

 

 

 

SIGNIFICANT

EVENT

FAILURE TO

MITIGATE OR AVOID ESCALATION

CONSEQUENCES

OF SIGNIFICANT EVENT

FAILURE TO

PREVENT FURTHER ESCALATION

CONSEQUENCES

OF ESCALATION

FURTHER

ESCALATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RECOMMENDATIONS, COMMENTS, ACTIONS

 

 

 

 

5. Quantified Risk Assessment (QRA)

 

Purpose: Frequency prediction, consequence prediction

 

Limitations: Very time-consuming unless, and even when, computerised. Requires skilled practitioners and failure data.

 

Advantages: Quantitative technique.

 

Description of technique: QRA puts together fault tree analysis, event tree analysis and numerical modelling of each type of consequence in order to obtain hazard ranges. It is best used when an objective criteria exists for the risk of certain events. The QRA calculates a risk for comparison with the criteria.

 

Input to the model is information on the hazards: sources of leak of hazardous materials to the environment, together with flowrates and frequencies. The model provides output in terms of risk versus distance contours for particular levels of harm.

 

There are a number of uncertainties in QRA. The three main areas in which uncertainties exist are:

 

1.  In the historically derived failure frequencies;

2.  In the consequence models which predict hazard ranges;

3.  In the prediction of the harm which a given level of exposure will do to a person.

 

A computerised model is not essential for QRA, but without one the process is extremely time-consuming and tedious, and is subject to numerical errors.

 

 

 

6. Short Cut Risk Assessment

 

Purpose: Frequency and consequence estimation.

 

Limitations / Advantages: Screening technique.

 

Description of technique: A short-cut risk assessment is a method of obtaining a measure  of  the  risk  on  a  quantitative  scale,  based  on  a  largely  qualitative assessment of the risk. The Dow and Mond indices, once used extensively in the chemical  industry  for  ranking  of  risks  prior  to  more  exhaustive  analysis,  are examples.

 

One such method, developed for use in the chemical industry, is as follows:

 

 

Target risk is defined by Target risk

 

=

log1010L + log1010S

 

=

L + S

 

where L is the exponent of the likelihood (measured by frequency – negative value)

and S is the severity ranking.

 

The scale for severity is chosen so that the target risk is only acceptable if it is less than or equal to zero. A preliminary estimate of the risk can be obtained by using experienced judgement about the severity, and getting a rough estimate of the frequency from published data.

 

 

 

 

TABLE 1 – SEVERITY RANKINGS CATASTROPHIC CONSEQUENCES: Severity 5

Catastrophic damage and severe clean-up costs On-site: Loss of normal occupancy > 3 months Off-site: Loss of normal occupancy > 1 month Severe national pressure to shut-down

Three or more fatalities of plant personnel

Fatality of member of public or at least five injuries

Damage to SSSI or historic building

Severe environmental damage involving permanent or long-term damage in a significant area of land

Acceptable frequency 0.00001 per year

 

 

 

 

SEVERE CONSEQUENCES: Severity 4

 

Severe damage and major clean-up

Major effect on business with loss of occupancy up to 3 months

Possible damage to public property

Single fatality or injuries to more than five plant personnel

A 1 in 10 chance of a public fatality

 

 

 

Short-term environmental damage over a significant area of land

Severe media reaction

Acceptable frequency 0.0001 per year

 

MAJOR CONSEQUENCES: Severity 3

 

Major damage and minor clear-up

Minor effect on business but no loss of building occupancy

Injuries to less than five plant personnel with 1 in 10 chance of fatality

Some hospitalisation of public

Short-term environmental damage to water, land, flora or fauna

Considerable media reaction

Acceptable frequency 0.001 times per year

 

APPRECIABLE CONSEQUENCES: Severity 2

 

Appreciable damage to plant

No effect on business

Reportable near missincident under CIMAH Injury to plant personnel

Minor annoyance to public

Acceptable frequency 0.01 times per year

 

MINOR CONSEQUENCES/NEAR MISS: Severity 1

 

Near-miss incident with significant quantity released

Minor damage to plant

No effect on business

Possible injury to plant personnel No effect on public, possible smell Acceptable frequency 0.1 times per year

 

 

 

7. Concept Safety Review

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification.

 

Limitations: Initial review only.

 

Advantages: Done at concept design stage so encourages inherently safe design.

 

Description of technique: This is used in the chemical industry at a very early stage in the design of a chemical plant – before the flow-sheet has even been developed. It looks at the options available, considers general organisational issues. A general information gathering exercise is undertaken regarding previous incidents both within and outside the organisation, the hazardous properties of those chemicals likely to be used and any alternatives.

 

The team looks at the objectives of the project, at possible process routes and at the chemicals that would be used for each route and the effluents generated. The objective is to obtain an appreciation of possible hazards in the process, of whether one chemical route would be expected to be better than another in terms of hazards, and of what legislation will be relevant to the proposed plant. This is the point when the extent and timing of all further safety reviews should be set. This review should be a means by which improvements in design procedures are made known to the designers and by which it is ensured that current thinking on ways of improving the design practice are implemented.

 

Products applicable to: All (particularly if combined with comparison with standards technique)

 

This is a useful technique and encourages inherent safety. It is very much aimed at the concept phase of a project. The inherent hazards of substances are considered in terms of the health and safety of personnel and the public and the environmental impact. Inherent safety is achieved by considering first whether a safer substance can be substituted and then whether inventories can be reduced. Additional guidance and worked examples would be required to show how it can be applied to Atex type products.

 

 

 

8. Concept Hazard Analysis

 

Purpose: Identification of major hazards.

 

Limitations: Concentrates only on major hazards.

 

Advantages: Done at concept design stage so encourages inherently safe design.

 

Description of technique: This can either take the form of a simple initial review of hazards or a more formal detailed review of hazards, their causes and possible safeguards. In both cases the plant is broken down into mangeable chunks each of which are considered using keyword such as EXPLOSION to stimulate discussion. In the case of the initial review each keyword is recorded along with the discussion and any recommendation/actions in a simple three columned table. In the case of the more formal analysis the table is broken down into six columns with the heading Ref No, Keyword, Dangerous Disturbance (Hazard), Cause/Consequences, Suggested Safeguards and Comment/Action.

 

Products applicable to: All except components

 

This is the most obviously useful technique. However appropriate keywords and an appropriate format for recording the analysis need to be developed. Clear guidance on  how  to  use  this  technique  with  examples  is  also  needed.  However  as  the keywords will be along the same lines as the checklist this technique may be indistinguishable.

 

 

 

9. Critical Examination of System Safety (CEX)

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

Limitations: Qualitative technique requiring a team approach which would need to be adopted as part of the design process. To be effective a number of departments would need to be involved eg design, service, safety.

 

Advantages: Allows and overall appreciation of hazards. Encourages innovation and inherent safety by design.

 

Description of technique: This method was the precursor of HAZOP in the chemical industry.

 

The method uses a team in brainstorming mode. It can be carried out at an early stage in the design, earlier than HAZOP. The method asks a series of questions about aspects of the safety system such as: What, When, How and Where, and these could be enhanced by the questions: Why, Why then, Why that way, Why there.

 

The questions can be used to create answers about the proposal (eg what is to be achieved by the safety system), alternatives (what else could be achieved), and conclusions (what should be achieved). The answers can then be used to specify the safety system, and implement it preferably by an inherently safe design.

 

 

 

10. Check-lists

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

Limitations: Depends on relevance of check-list.

 

Advantages: Simple, can be used by individual or team.

 

Description of technique: A list of possible hazards is taken and each item on the list is considered in terms of whether it applies to the system being studied.

 

 

 

Check lists are a Comparative Method and may be derived from experience alone (including codes of practice and standards) or may be derived for a particular type of plant from application of the fundamental techniques, avoiding the need to repeat the whole study when a very similar design is to be considered.

 

Check lists are essentially a simple and empirical means of applying experience to designs or situations to ensure that the features appearing in the list are not overlooked.

 

Lists are the most basic method of hazard identification. They may relate to material properties or, for example, they may be equipment specific.

 

A check list will serve as a list of subject pointers which will require attention at each stage in the life of equipment and unit operations. They are most effective when used to stimulate thought and enquiry through open ended questions rather than in the form that requires yes/no answers.

 

 

 

11. Standards (comparison of designs with known safety standards)

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

Limitations: Careful consideration needs to be given to the scope of application of standards to ensure that they apply. They can be time consuming to understand and many standards may be necessary to cover all aspects.

 

Advantages: They provide authoritative guidance, particularly to the integrity of detailed designs, and they can provide a quick check on safety requirements or factors which need to be considered. Most designers appreciate the value of standards and use appropriate ones on a regular basis.

 

Description of technique: Design details are compared with the requirements of standards. The standards may be written by groups of experts to give International or national requirements or they may be developed in-house to accepted, well established standards.

 

 

 

12. Sneak Analysis

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

Limitations: Qualitative technique requiring skilled practitioner. Time-Consuming for complex systems.

 

Advantages: Takes account of topography/layout.

 

Description of technique: Sneak analysis is a technique which aims to identify hazards associated with the topography of process plants – i.e. how the different components are connected together. It is a development of Sneak Circuit Analysis which is used for electronic circuits.

 

The objective is to identify sneak paths, i.e. paths by which material or energy can unintentionally flow between different parts of the system. The method can be simplified by the use of "clues" which are statements about common topologies and the sneaks that can be associated with them. Such clues can form effective check- lists.

 

A "sneak" is a condition which allows an action to take place along an unintended path. A path is defined as the way in which things move from one place to another, including electric current in wires, fluids in pipes, information in an organisation, data and control in a computer program. Unintended paths are ones which the designers did not intend to exist. Such paths may be the result of design error, failure of components or actions of personnel.

 

Sneak analysis is done by a team in a similar way to a HAZOP. It is an addition rather  than  an  alternative  to  a  HAZOP  and  it  has  been  suggested  that  it  has particular advantages for batch plants.

 

 

 

13. Task Analysis

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

Limitations: Only applicable to human error analysis. Very time-consuming except for very simple tasks.

 

Advantages: Allows complex tasks to be analysed in detail and understood.

 

Description of technique: Task analysis derives from method study techniques. It is a systematic method for analysing a task into its goals and the actions and plans required to achieve these goals.

 

The overall task first needs to be described in terms of its goals, actions and plans. One technique is hierarchical task analysis (HTA) where a complex task is broken down into a number of more simple sub-tasks. Each sub-task may then be broken down into further sub-tasks. This process is continued until the sub-tasks reach the level of individual tasks.

 

The hierarchical task analysis is recorded as a tree structure showing this break down i.e. all tasks entering a sub-task at the next level of the tree have to be done in order to achieve that sub-task. The plan for each operation can also be recorded on the tree (see diagram). Task analysis can be used for developing operating procedures and training, job aids, and as an input to human error analysis.

 

Figure A.3 – Hierarchical Task Analysis

 

 

 

 

14. Hazardous Human Error Analysis (HHEA)

 

Purpose: To identify hazards associated with human interaction with equipment

 

Limitations: Focuses on the operator and may neglect other persons at risk. Only takes into account equipment failure in a limited way.

 

Advantages: Fully takes into account human factors including foreseeable misuse. Can be used equally well for all phases of use from commissioning through maintenance and decommissioning.

 

Description of technique: This is a new technique, developed by the risk assessment section of the UK Health and Safety Laboratory, HSE, takes elements from Task Analysis and Action Error Analysis and combines them. It is best carried out by a team of not less than 3 persons and no more than 8. Rather than keywords as such, key questions and a list of human-error type classifications (from Action Error Analysis) are used as discussion points to “brainstorm” ideas. Record sheets in the form of tables are also used to structure the discussions and keep a record of them. The effectiveness of the analysis is dependent on the skill of the chairperson who has to ensure that the team is thorough whilst not getting bogged down in detail.

 

It is particularly important when carrying out a HHEA to have at least one person in the team who has a detailed appreciation of how the machine is likely to be operated. This can for example be an experienced operator of this type of machinery or someone who has a lot of contact with the operators, such as a service engineer.

 

Before starting the analysis it is important to clearly define all the relevant phases of machinery life. Any user manual or instructions for use would be a particularly good starting point for this technique.

 

The key tasks relating to the use of the machine then need to be listed. This is best done as a brainstorming session by the chairperson writing them down on a wipe- board or flip-chart as they are called out. They will then need organising into a logical order and any duplicates removed. Some of the tasks listed may be sub-tasks of others and should be organised to reflect this fact. It is important that these sub-tasks are not simply deleted.

 

Each key-task should then be considered in turn and broken down into more detailed sub-tasks and numbered. The human error type classifications listed overleaf are then used, in a similar way as keywords, to brainstorm a list of potential human errors that can be made in carrying out the task and moreover, the hazards that these errors will expose the operator to.

 

Error type                                     Explanation

 

Error of omission                            Failure to perform an action, absence of response. Error of time                                                           Action performed but not at or within proper time. Extraneous act                                                           Unnecessary action not required by procedure Transposition                                                           Correct  action  on  wrong  unit,  system,  train  or component.

Error of selection                            Incorrect selection control

 

 

 

Error of sequence                           Performance of correct actions in wrong order if this is significant for success of the task.

Miscommunication                         Failure  to  communicate  or  receive  information correctly.

Qualitative errors                            By     excess     or     by     default     (perform     action incompletely).

Other                                           Anything else.

 

Each error is given a unique reference number and discussed in turn by the team to consider:

 

What hazard the human error would expose the operator or any bystanders to? What is the range of consequences, from most usual to worst, likely to result? What factors could increase the risk of harm?

What  actions/factors  could  decrease  the  risk  of  harm,  including  existing safeguards which will protect against the error being made, or the hazard thus exposed causing harm?

What safeguards are suggested to protect against the error being made or the hazard thus exposed causing harm?

Finally, are there any further comments that need to be made or any actions that need to be carried out, and by whom?

 

The record sheets for use with the analysis described above is shown at the end of this appendix. Each sheet is headed “HAZARDOUS HUMAN ERROR ANALYSIS” and has space at the top for recording:

 

the machine on which the analysis is being carried out;

the key-task to which the sheet relates;

the date of the analysis;

the sheet number and the total number of sheets used.

 

It is recommended that a fresh record sheet be used for each key task. There are a total of eight columns in the table on the sheet which are used as follows:

 

“SUB-TASK” is used to record the sub-task and its number;

 

“REF-NO” is for a unique reference number for each identified potential human error that could be made whilst carrying out the sub-task under consideration;

 

“POTENTIAL HUMAN ERROR” is used to record each human error that the team thinks could be made whilst carrying out the sub-task under consideration;

“HAZARD EXPOSED TO” is used to record information about the hazards that each error would expose a person to;

 

“CONSEQUENCES” is used to record a brief description of what could happen should the hazard be realised in terms of the range of possible consequences from the most likely to the worst case, whether these are RIDDOR reportable, and how many people may be involved;

 

“INCREASING FACTORS” is used to record what factors or actions could increase the likelihood of the error occurring and/or the risk of harm;

 

 

 

 

 

"DECREASING  FACTORS" is used to record what factors or actions could decrease the likelihood  of the error occurring  and/or the risk of harm, including any existing or proposed safeguards;

"COMMENTS 1 ACTION" is used to record any additional information  which doesn

really  fit anywhere  else,  any  references  (particularly  standards)  considered  to  be useful and any actions - usually to look at something in more detail at a later date Note  when  recording  actions  it  is  important  to  make  sure  thal it  is clear  who  is expected to carry them out.

 

 

 

15. Human Reliability Analysis

 

Purpose: Frequency prediction for human failure.

 

Limitations: Time-consuming. Relies on availability of human failure rate data for the lowest level individual tasks. Requires a skilled human factors practitioner.

 

Advantages: Quantitative technique allowing limited prediction of human error.

 

Description of technique:The first steps in this are hierarchical task analysis and action error analysis. It is important to note for each task analysed what the effects of error at this stage would be, and whether or not it would result in a hazard. For those errors which would result in a hazard, is error recovery possible? Probabilities are then assigned for each human error in the hierarchy which would lead to a hazard. This would usually be on the basis of historical data for the same error mode.

 

The probabilities would be modified on the basis of the evaluation of:

 

-      Performance  influencing  factors  (PIFs).  These  range  form  environmental  and ergonomic factors to the safety culture of the organisation.

 

-      Recovery factors (RFs). The likelihood that the operator will notice and recover from the error.

 

-      Error  Reduction  Strategies  (ERSs).  These  are  usually  a  redesign  of  the task/environment as a result of the above analysis.

 

The analysis would need to be carried out by a human reliability specialist, usually with computerised support. This type of analysis can be very time-consuming.

 

 

 

16. What-If ? Analysis

 

Purpose: Frequency prediction for human failure.

 

Limitations: Qualitative technique requiring suitable check-list.

 

Advantages: Easy to use.

 

Description of technique: A what-if analysis is carried out by a team and asks questions relating to specifc aspects of the design intent (e.g., in the chemical industry, such aspects as blockages, leaks, corrosion, vibration, partial failures, external events).

 

The experience of the team members can be supplemented by checks lists of questions to ask about specific items of equipment. The answers to the questions may reveal hazards that require elimination or protection.

 

What-if List for Compressors

 

What if high temperature in compressor? What if loss of cooling?

What if excessive recycle around compressor?

What if loss of lubrication?

What if compressor valve failure?

What if insufficient flow through compressor? What if excess compression ratio?

What if increase in feed temperature? What if compressor subjected to local fire?

 

What if entrained liquid in feed?

What if contaminants or solid particles admitted to unit? What if air entry due to vacuum or maintenance?

 

What if excessive speed or reverse rotation? What if suction valve fails open?

What if excess recycle flow?

What if blocked discharge?

What if overpressure of compressor? What if excess back pressure?

 

What if increase in feed pressure?

What if lack of demand for output stream? What if failure of pressure control?

What if suction valve closed?

 

What if low feed pressure or feed line fails? What if underpressure due to underspeed?

 

What if compressor stops or performance degraded? What if mechanical deterioration in the compressor? What if coupling to driver fails?

 

 

 

What if vibration loosens coupling?

What if deterioration of construction materials or seals?

 

What if inadequate isolation for maintenance?

What if inadequate procedures for maintenance and restart? What if control system fails?

 

What if emergency control system fails?

What if relief system fails to reduce overpressure? What if relief valve fails open?

What if relief valve fails closed?

What if inadequate flow through relief line? What if failure of services?

What if compressor subjected to external cause?

What if freezing conditions or other environmental extreme?

 

 

 

Products applicable to: All

 

This technique is a brainstorming approach and is a particularly useful technique. It is best performed by a group of people who are familiar with the equipment, and consequently it would not be practical to suggest a generic What-if? list. This means that clear guidance is required, illustrated by examples, to show how a manufacturer can draw up a What-if? list for their products.

The ‘What if..?’ technique can be combined with the checklist analysis to increase the efficacy of the hazard identification. This combination of techniques is a method which is advocated by Det Norske Veritas and is referred to as SWIFT (structured what if checklist).

 

It is intended that the ‘What if...?’ questions are asked within categories, although there is no need to stick to this rigorously, suggested categories are [5]:

Material problems

External factor influences

Operating error and other human factors

Equipment/instrumentation malfunction

 

Process upsets of unspecified origin

Utility failures

Integrity failure or loss of control

Emergency operations

 

Alternatively the What-if? categories could be simpler for example using the PEEP

concept (as described) in ‘A guide to the Machinery Directive’):

People (considers the interaction of personnel with the equipment) Equipment (hazards which are inherent to the equipment)

Environment (considers the environment the equipment is to be used in) Process (the materials which are to be handled by the equipment)

 

At its simplest the technique generates a list of questions and answers, however a more detailed study could involve taking the analysis further for example identifying mitigating factors.

 

 

 

17. Reliability Block Diagram

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification

 

Limitations: Trivial except for complex systems.

 

Advantages: Can be used as a starting point for other techniques.

 

Description of technique: A reliability block diagram is a block diagram showing components in a system. It shows the logic of which components are required by other components in order for the system to work. It is capable of showing that some components are duplicated.

 

A reliability block diagram is in some ways similar to a fault tree, but has less capability for showing logic and is not focused on particular hazardous events. Reliability block diagrams are primarily tools for estimating the reliability of a system and rather than ist hazards.

 

Figure A.4 – Block Diagram of Power Supply

 

 

 

84

 

 

 

 

Figure  A.5 - Reliability Block  Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Ckygen)

 

Oxygen mate-up

Contoiler

 

 

 

EBV-1

Retum   u   Removal                                                                                                                                                                                                                              On

COz                                 ..  Filier                  _..   Sterilizer                                     Cooler                     De-humidifier  -

 

 

 

 

Air

 

 

 

 

Refridgention

1nd Waste He t

 

 

 

 

 

 

Emergency

 

l                   u

( W11er Stcnge

 

 

 

 

Air

 

COl                                                                                 Byplm

Disposai

 

 

 

 

Water

Steriliser

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

()

L- '"

 

 

 

 

Coollns

Air

 

 

 

Air out

 

 

 

EIJV-2

 

 

Humidifier                      Heater

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

18. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification and consequence prediction

 

Limitations: Qualitative technique which is time-consuming to use, particularly if a complex systems is being analysed.

 

Advantages:  Systematic and comprehensive technique.

 

Description of technique: FMEA is a qualitative technique for examining a system and identifying all the failure modes and their effects on the system. It is most usually used for electronic, electrical or mechanical equipment. The starting point of an FMEA would usually be a reliability block diagram for the system. A team would go through the system component by component asking questions about the failure modes for each component and the cause and effect of each failure mode. Methods of prevention or compensation for failures with significant hazardous effects would also be considered, so that the FMEA exercise would usually lead to a modified, safer design.

 

Products applicable to:  Components, discreet items, simple protective systems FMEA  is  a  useful,  wellknown  technique  and  documented  technique.  For  more detailed  description  try  IEC60812  –  Analysis  techniques  for  system  reliability  – procedure for failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA). This technique is particularly useful for identifying failure modes which could lead to the creation of intermittent and permanent ignition sources or the failure of protective systems. FMEA could also be used to identify failures leading to loss of containment. However other techniques may be more appropriate. The purpose subsection should therefore be altered to reflect this. i. e. purpose: to identify failure modes that can lead to the creation of an ignition source.

 

Full blown FMEA is likely to be overly complex and time-consuming for complete or complex items of equipment and anything but the most simple protective systems. However in these cases Functional FMEA may be used.

A functional FMEA consist of the following steps:

1.  Identify the functions of the equipment

2.  What happens if the equipment fails to achieve each of its functions?

3.  What are the mechanisms by which this failure can occur?

4.  How do you recognise the failure?

5.  Are there any recovery mechanisms?

 

Unlike the conventional FMEA study the equipment isn’t broken down into single components, instead it is broken down into the functions which it is to perform. As an example a flammable gas detection and automatic isolation might be broken down into:

Detection of flammable gas

Transmit signal to ASOV (automatic shut-off valve) Valve closes and isolates flow

 

This method could be used at the beginning of the study to help the analyst produce a set of questions for the ‘What if...?’ study.

 

 

 

19. Failure Mode and Effect Criticality Analysis (FMECA)

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification, consequence and frequency prediction

 

Limitations: Time-consuming for complex systems

 

Advantages: Gives semi-quantitative ranking of risk.

 

Description of technique: This is similar to FMEA but goes further by ranking the hazards  arising  from  the  failure  modes  identified  in  either  a  qualitative  or  a quantitative way. There are a number of possible variations on the method.

 

Qualitative method

 

One  method  (DEF-STAN  00-41  –  US  Defence  Standard)  requires  a  qualitative probability of occurrence to be assigned to each failure mode. These are as follows:

 

Level                                                 Probability of Occurence, P

A

Frequent

1.0

P

0.2

B

Often

0.2

P

0.1

C

Occasional

0.1

P

0.01

D

Remote

0.01

P

0.001

E

Unlikely

0.001

P

0

 

 

Criticality number

 

A quantitative method from DEF-STAN 00-41 is to assign a criticality number to either a failure mode or a component.

 

Failure mode criticality number = abcde

 

where a =      failure  mode  ratio  =  proportion  of  the  failure  probability  for  the component which is due to this failure mode.

 

b =     conditional  probability  of  mission  loss  (or  that  failure  behave  in  a hazardous way).

 

Actual loss               b = 1

Probable loss          0.1 < b < 1

Possible loss           0 > b < 0.1

No effect                   b = 0

 

c =     failure rate modifying factor, if the failure rate used needs to be modified due to the particular environmental conditions in which the component is operating.

 

d =     part failure rate = failures per hour of the component in the failure mode specified, preferably taken from operating experience in a similar environment, or else from a suitable database.

The item criticality is the sum of the failure mode criticalities for the item in question.

 

 

 

Risk Priority Number

 

Another semi-quantitative method for FMECA is the Risk Priority Number (RPN)

method.

 

Three numbers are allocated for each failure mode and its effect:

 

1.  Occurence of failure, on a scale of 1 to 10 where 1 is unlikely.

2.  Severity of failure, on a scale 1 to 10 where 1 indicates minimal consequence.

3.  Detection of failure, on a scale 1 to 10 where 1 indicates a high likelihood of fault detection and recovery.

 

The RPN is the product of the three numbers, and allows the effects of different failure modes to be ranked.

 

 

 

Failure Rate/Severity Method

 

 

For this method an FMEA is carried out, with columns asking questions about:

 

a)         failure mode b)      failure cause

c)         failure effect – especially whether it is local or effects the whole system

d)         prevention/compensation what stops failure from effecting the whole system?

e)         failure rate – taken from a suitable database f)          severity – a category is assigned

 

Category                    I          Catastrophic. Loss of life

II

Critical.

Causes severe injury

III

IV

Major.

Minor.

Causes minor injury

Requires unscheduled repair

 

 

 

20. Maintenance Analysis

 

 

 

 

 

Purpose: Hazard Identification and frequency prediction for maintenance activities.

 

Limitations: Time-consuming. Requires skilled analyst.

Advantages: Maintenance problems looked at systematically using qualitative or quantitative techniques.

Description of technique: This is usually concerned with ensuring equipment availability, but could be relevant if there were particular hazards associated with maintenance.

The  analysis  can  be  done  in  either  a  qualitative  or  a  quantitative  way.  The quantitative methods obtain a value for the availability of equipment given the need to periodically maintain it.

Maintenance analysis asks questions about:

·    what failures can occur,

·    how a fault would be identified/detected,

·    how the underlying failure could be diagnosed,

·    what preparation is required for repair,

·    what resources are required for repair,

·    how the failed part should be removed, repaired if possible, and replaced,

·    what checks are required after maintenance,

·    how normal operation should be restored.

21. Structural Reliability Analysis

Purpose: Hazard Identification consequence assessment.

Limitations / Advantages: Structural steelwork.

Description of technique: This is a method of looking at structures in order ro determine the safety margin present in structures and the effects of partial failure on the overall structure. The methods have application, for example, in analysing the safety of offshore oil or gas platforms in a variety of weather conditions.

22. Techniques based on Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic

Purpose: Quantisation of frequency and consequences.

Limitations: Requires experts

Advantages: Quantifies qualitative opinion.

Description of technique: These methods operate on "linguistic variables" in order to produce a quantitative output from a qualitative input. They might be useful in cases where the only data available is subjective judgement from people not able to put it into quantitative terms.

23. DEFI method

Purpose: Hazard Identification

Limitations:  More  a  way  of  assessing  the  reliability  of  hardware  rather  than predicting hazards. Hardware needs to have been constructed to allow the technique to be used.

Description of technique: DEFI is a method which uses the injection of faults into a computerised                              system    to    determine    the    rate    of    failure    to    danger.

24. Delphi Technique

Purpose: Frequency prediction.

Limitations: Requires experts.

Description of technique: This is a technique which formalises the process of obtaining estimates for failure rates, frequencies of hazardous events etc., by expert judgement. A large circle of experts are questioned several times, each time the estimates and comments obtained previously are summarised and fed back. This continues until agreement is reached. It has been used in the US nuclear industry to estimate failure rates of various components.  An essential feature is that the values suggested by one expert are presented anonymously to the other participants. Comments are also anonomised. It is important that participants only comment and provide estimates in areas where they have experience themselves and this should be made clear at the outset.

25.   Method   Organised   Systematic   Analysis   of   Risks

(MOSAR)

Purpose: Hazard Identification, frequency & consequence prediction.

Limitations: Time-consuming.

Advantages: Systematic risk analysis technique.

Description of technique: This is a systematic approach which uses a series of steps to look at the safety of a system. The system is seen as a series of interacting subsystems. A number of tables are filled in by the team carrying out the analysis.

1)       Hazard identification

2)       Adequacy of prevention

3)       Interdependency

4)       Operating safety study using FMEA or HAZOP

5)       Logic trees

6)       Severity table

7)       Linking of severity with protection objectives

8)       Technological barriers (no human intervention)

9)       Utilisation barriers (with human intervention)

10)     Acceptability table for residual risks

26. Goal Oriented Failure Analysis (GOFA)

Purpose: Hazard Identification

Limitations: Time-consuming. Difficult to learn. Scope of application is limited to the failure goals considered.

Advantages: Provides a practical approach to identifying the factors which can lead to the realisation of a hazard.

Description of technique: GOFA uses a systems analysis approach and develops a systems  diagram  for  the  hazard  identification  process.  GOFA  is  a  top-down technique (i.e. focused on a particular top event) which is intended to be a hybrid of FMEA and fault-tree analysis.

The systems diagram is created by a team for a specific failure goal (e. g. emergency isolation system fails to operate during an emergency).

The steps in the process are:

1)       Define the failure goal.

2)       Draw up and agree the systems diagram.

3)        Determine the fault modes for each component in each subsystem of the systems diagram, using check-lists for support.

4)       Choose a component for detailed study.

5)       Choose a fault mode for this component.

6)       Identify failure mechanisms for the chosen fault mode.

7)       Choose a failure mechanism.

8)        Identify the failure causes for this failure mechanism. These may be external to the systems diagram or internal if caused by other components.

9)       Return to step 7 until complete.

10)     Return to step 5 until complete.

11)     Return to step 4 until complete.

92

PIPBUNB ISOLATION SYSTBM


Annex VI

Application of the risk assessment methodology

Introduction

This Annex provides information on how to perform a risk assessment on a piece of equipment or unit operation using the methodology described in this standard. The user should be clear that risk assessment can often be a complex process requiring specific expertise and it is unlikely that someone without previous experience will be able to carry out a satisfactory risk assessment solely by following this standard. Examples are provided which describe how the risk assessment methodology has been applied to the following systems:

A pneumatic powder transfer system

A paint spray booth

Oil seed extraction unit

Spray Dryer for Milk

Protective system – An explosion venting door

Exhaust System of Gas Engine

The risk assessments described are purely illustrative and should not be used as a complete risk assessment for an actual system without further consideration. In addition it should be recognised that this methodology has been designed to assess the risks relating to explosions which can arise in the use of equipment. Additional risk assessments will be necessary to determine possible risks relating to other hazards, for example protection of operators etc.

Use of the methodology

As described in Section 5, a risk assessment should be carried out using a series of logical steps following the definition of the intended use of the equipment or unit operation. Where a complex system is being assessed, it is often useful to divide the system into individual items or groups of items that perform discrete operations, however in such cases extreme care must be taken to ensure that any interrelationship between the risks for each item is fully considered.

Determination of intended use

The correct definition of intended use is critical to performing a successful risk assessment as it provides boundaries within which hazards need to be identified and the possible risks assessed.

Description of the system

This should include a general description of the system, its means of operation to achieve the desired function.

Equipment characteristics

The system should be described in sufficient detail such that any possible ignition sources can be identified. The description should include where appropriate, sizes, throughput, material of construction etc.

Product characteristics

The  flammability  and  explosibility  characteristics  of  the  products  being  handled should be listed.

Functional / State Analysis

The Functional / State analysis described in Section 5.1 can be used where there are uncertainties in how and where a piece of equipment will be used. It is important that the definition of intended use clearly specifies the nature and type of explosive atmosphere which may be present and considers the state of the equipment not only during normal operation but also during start-up and shut-down. During the course of a  risk assessment procedure  it  is  often  found  that  the  intended  use  has  to  be changed. This occurs particularly with respect to the nature of the explosive atmosphere in which the equipment is to be used.

Hazard Identification

Once the intended use of the equipment has been initially defined, the process of hazard identification can be carried out. During this step all possible hazards which may occur must be identified. The aim is to determine whether the equipment or unit operation can present a potential ignition source and to identify whether a potentially explosive atmosphere is present. The evaluation usually starts with the consideration of the equipment in normal operation and is then extended to consider expected malfunctions and rare malfunctions depending on the intended final classification of the equipment i.e. the equipment category (see Section 0). An assessment has to be made of the probability that the ignition source will occur and its effectiveness in igniting the explosive atmosphere, this requires detailed information on the flammability and explosive characteristics of the explosive atmospheres. The results of this analysis must be recorded using the form in Section 5.2.

Risk Estimation

Once all the hazards have been identified, an estimate of the severity of the possible harm which can arise and the probability of the occurrence of each hazard has to be made in order to rank the risks. The severity is ranked in four levels ranging from ’catastrophic’ to ‘negligible’ while the probability of an event occurring is expressed in five stages from frequent to improbable. A qualitative estimation of the resulting risk level is then made using the matrix given in Section 5.3. This results in four risk levels ranging from ‘A’ representing a high risk level to ‘D’ a low risk level.

Risk Evaluation

At this stage of the procedure a table listing all possible hazards which may arise together with a ranking of the risk level for each hazard will be available. This enables a decision to be made as to whether further action is required to reduce the risk to an acceptable level (see Section 5.4). Where the risk estimation results in a risk level of A, the risk is so high as to be intolerable and additional risk reduction measures are required. Similarly a risk level of D can be considered to be acceptable and no further risk reduction is required. Risk levels B and C are intermediate levels and will normally require some form of risk reduction measures to make the risk acceptable. However, the degree of these measures will be smaller and in the case of a risk level C, organisational risk reduction measures will often be sufficient.

Risk Reduction Option Analysis

Once the risk has been estimated and evaluated the risk reduction option analysis leads to the final decision as to whether or not the solution found reduces the risk to an acceptable level. It is necessary to deal with residual risks after all measures have been taken to reduce the probability and consequence of a specific hazardous event. The residual risks are those against which risk reduction by design and safeguarding techniques are not, or not totally, effective. Residual risks must be documented and included in the instructions for use of the equipment. If all the risks are classified as acceptable then no Risk Reduction is required and the Risk Assessment is complete.

Iteration of the risk assessment procedure

When the risk reduction option analysis shows that risks remain which are unacceptable then the risk assessment must be repeated. This should be carried out in an iterative manner after amending the safety concept or the definition of intended use until all risks have been reduced to an acceptable level.

A pneumatic powder transfer system

Determination of intended use

The aim of the system is unloading, pneumatic conveying (PC) under air pressure and storing of granular combustible or uncombustible materials for further use.

Description of the system

The installation for the pneumatic unloading of crystallised sugar from a lorry to a silo is shown in the figure.

Schematic diagram of the installation

Equipment characteristics

The installation consists of different equipment :

a 30 m3 lorry (out of the scope of the risk assessment) is able to withstand 2 bar overpressure. A compressor is generally installed on the lorry and coupled to the engine,

pipes and couplings (length : 30 m, diameter : 100 mm) are able to withstand 30 bar,

the storage silo has a volume of 110 m3, a height/diameter ratio of 4 and is fitted with a vent on the top which has been designed to open at 0.1 barg (Pstat) resulting in a residual pressure in the case of an explosion of 0.4 barg (Pred),

a blow tank has an operating pressure of 1.2 barg (Pf). As the maximum pressure during an explosion of the product is 8 barg (Pmax), the mechanical resistance of this blow tank is 18,8 barg (Pm). It is fitted with a level control,

a pneumatic conveying line (length : 100 m, diameter : 100 mm),

a hopper has a volume of 3 m3, a height/diameter ratio of 2 and is fitted with an explosion vent which has been designed to open at 0.2 barg (Pstat) resulting a reduced explosion pressure in the case of an explosion of 0.5 barg (Pred). The hopper is fitted with a filter and a level control and has a rotary valve in the outlet.

Equipment is made of metallic parts and normally grounded.

Product characteristics

The installation has been designed for use with crystallised sugar with a grain size about 600 µm. However it is known that during operation appreciable amounts of sugar powder can be formed with a particle size of 20 µm. The following explosibility characteristics for the 20 µm dust formed have been measured :

Kst : 130 bar.m.s-1, Pmax : 8 bar,

Minimum Ignition Energy : 20 mJ.

Functional / State Analysis

A functional state analysis of the system is shown in the figure:

Physical state of the substance

Unit operations           Energies/operating state

Lorry

crystallised sugar (particle size : 600 to 20 µm)

+-    Lorry unloading pneumatic conveying

+-                 Moist air

Maximal pressure = 2 bar

Maximum air temperature = 60°C

dusty                         +-      Storage in silo gravity feed

dusty                         +-    Filling of the blow tank

gravity feed

dusty                         +-    Filling of the hopper gravity feed

dusty                         +-    Unloading of the hopper

+-           Operation of valves

V1 and V2

+-           Operation of valves

V3, V5 and V7

No temperature increase

Pressure : 1.2 barg

Functional state analysis of the pneumatic unloading system

Hazard Identification

Potential ignition sources:

Ignition Sources

Possible

Relevant

(Yes/No)

Significant

(include reason)

Hot surface

No

 

Flames and hot gases (including hot particles)

No

 

Mechanically generated sparks

Yes

Yes

Electrical apparatus

Yes

Yes

Stray electric currents, cathodic corrosion protection

No

 

Static electricity:

Yes

 

Corona discharges

Yes

No - MIE dust cloud 20 mJ

Brush discharges

Yes

No - MIE dust cloud 20 mJ

Propagating brush discharges

Yes

Yes

Cone discharges

Yes

No - Size of the equipments too small, granulometry of the product too small, MIE dust cloud 20 mJ

Spark discharges

Yes

Yes

Lightning

Study to be undertaken by the user

Radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic waves from 104 Hz to 3 x 1012 Hz

No

 

Electromagnetic waves from 3 x 1011 Hz to 3 x 1015 Hz

No

 

Ionizing radiation

No

 

Ultrasonics

No

 

Adiabatic compression and shock waves

No

 

Exothermic reactions, including self- ignition of dusts

No

 

Table of Ignition sources

When  «’no’»  is  mentioned  in  the  second  column,  it  means  that  the  specified equipment can not generate this type of ignition source.

 

 

Explosive Atmosphere

Ignition Source

 

Ref

.

Type

Frequency of occurrence or release

Location

Type

Cause

Likelihood

Effective- ness of ignition sources

1

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present at the end of loading

Inside the pneumatic pipe

Static electricity sparks

No earthing

During malfunction

High as energy > MIE

2

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present at the end of loading

Inside the pneumatic pipe

Mechanica l sparks or heating

Introduction of foreign bodies

During rare malfunction

Low as grid at the PC inlet

3

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the silo

Static electricity sparks

No earthing

During malfunction

High as energy > MIE

4

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the silo

Mechanica l sparks or heating

Introduction of foreign bodies

During rare malfunction

Low as grid at the PC inlet

present

5

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the blow tank

Static electricity sparks

No earthing

During malfunction

High as energy > MIE

6

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the blow tank

Mechanica l sparks or heating

Introduction of foreign bodies

During rare malfunction

High as valves present

7

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the blow tank

Electric sparks

Level control

During malfunction

High as energy > MIE

8

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the hopper

Static electricity sparks

No earthing

During malfunction

High as energy > MIE

9

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the hopper

Mechanica l sparks or heating

Introduction of foreign bodies

During rare malfunction

Low as pneumatic conveying

10

Cloud of explosible sugar dust

Present during filling

Inside the hopper

Electric sparks

Level control

During malfunction

High as energy > MIE

Table recording hazards identified

Risk Estimation / Risk evaluation

For each hazardous event referred in the hazard identification, the frequency and severity of each risk has been estimated using criteria given in the methodology. The risk level has then been determined using the frequency-severity matrix in Section 5 in the methodology

This first risk estimation does not take into account the preventive and protective measures.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

probable

major

A

2

probable

major

A

3

probable

major

A

4

remote

major

B

5

probable

major

A

6

probable

major

A

7

probable

major

A

8

probable

major

A

9

remote

major

B

10

probable

major

A

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk level

Risk Reduction Option Analysis

Preventive and protective measures have to be applied, to reduce the frequency and/or the severity. The following measures are proposed:

procedure of earthing,

grid at the PC inlet, magnetic detector,

explosion pressure resistant vessel for the pipes and coupling, vent on the silo,

explosion pressure resistant vessel for the blow tank, level control for use in dusts explosive atmospheres,

vent on the hopper taking into account the ignition of a jet flame, or a vent with an explosion decoupling system.

Iteration of the risk assessment procedure

After the application of all these preventive and protective measures, a new risk estimation and risk evaluation have been made.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

Remote

minor

C

2

Occasional

minor

B

3

Remote

minor

C

4

Remote

minor

C

5

Remote

minor

C

6

Occasional

minor

B

7

Occasional

minor

B

8

Remote

minor

C

9

Remote

minor

C

10

Occasional

minor

B

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk levels after Risk

reduction measures

A paint spray booth

Determination of intended use

The application of paints, varnishes, lacquers and other coatings to models and test pieces manufactured in a workshop. The paint-spray booth is used occasionally by one trained operator (or under his supervision). This person is also responsible for general housekeeping, cleaning, replacement of filters etc.

Description of the system

 

The manually operated paint spray booth is situated inside a busy workshop. It is enclosed on three sides and open fronted to allow easy access. Work pieces can be either hung from a bar or placed on a metal table. Paint contained within a storage can, forming part of the spray gun, is atomised by compressed air supplied by a high pressure  flexible  hose   from   a   compressor,   (outside   the   scope   of   the   risk assessment),  at  4  bar.  The  booth  is  ventilated  from  the  rear  in  order  to  draw overspray away from the operator and keep the concentration of the volatiles below the lower explosive limit within the booth. The air flows are tested every six months to check that they are within design parameters. Glass fibre filter pads separate the spray area and the ventilation ducting to remove any entrained paint present in the air flow. These can be easily changed after set periods of use. Ducting removes the air out of the back of the booth to an area outside the workshop containing no ignition sources. The operator wears a breathing mask when spraying is performed to minimise occupational health risks associated with the material being sprayed. The most commonly used coating material are water based lacquers, and paints containing volatile flammable solvents are used only occasionally.

Schematic diagram of the installation

Equipment characteristics

The spray gun is manually operated, and is connected to an air line supplying air at

4 bar, and a container holding up to 1x10-3m3  of paint. The ventilation with the

entrained overspray passes through a fire retardant glass fibre filter (which captures the overspray and is easily changeable). The air flow then passes through ducting connected to the back of the booth to an area outside the building. The fan is situated inside the ducting, and is belt fed by an electric motor, which is located outside the ducting. Illumination is provided by a light, which is sealed from the atmosphere in the booth behind a glass plate. The booth is constructed to withstand a fire for up to half an hour. The dimensions of the booth are a height of 2.1m, a width of 2.5m, and a depth of 2m of which 1m is in front of the filter, a volumetric   air throughput of

3.55m3/s is achieved by the booth.

Product characteristics

The characteristics of the paint used in the assessment are:- Boiling point                                                           138 C

Flash point                                       35 C

Auto ignition temperature              490 C Explosive limits     1-6.6% Vol Volatile content              40%

Functional / State Analysis

A functional state analysis of the system is shown in the figure:

Functional state analysis of the paint spray booth

Hazard Identification

Ignition Sources

Possible

Relevant

(Yes/No)

Significant

(include reason)

Hot surface

Yes

Yes – though will depend on the temperature and size of the surface

Flames and hot gases (including hot particles)

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Mechanically generated sparks

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Electrical apparatus

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Stray electric currents, cathodic corrosion protection

No

 

Static electricity:

 

 

Corona discharges

Yes

No – insufficient energy

Brush discharges

Yes

Yes –will only provide sufficient energy for a vapour explosion

Propagating brush discharges

No

 

Cone discharges

No

 

Spark discharges

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Lightning

No

 

Radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic waves from 104 Hz to 3 x 1012 Hz

No

 

Electromagnetic waves from 3 x 1011 Hz to 3 x 1015 Hz

No

 

Ionizing radiation

No

 

Ultrasonics

No

 

Adiabatic compression and shock waves

No

 

Exothermic reactions, including self- ignition of dusts

No

 

Table of Ignition sources

 

 

Explosive Atmosphere

Ignition Source

 

Ref

.

Type

Frequency of occurrence or release

Location

Type

Cause

Likelihood

Effective- ness of ignition sources

1

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Static electricity

Static producing clothing

Likely to occur during malfunction

High

2

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Mechanical sparks

Additional work being performed in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

3

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Mechanical sparks

The fan striking the ducting

Likely to occur during malfunction

High

4

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Electrical sparks

Additional work being performed in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

5

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Hot surface

Additional work being performed in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

6

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Hot surface

Glass breaks allowing access to the light

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

Medium

7

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Inside

the spray booth

Naked flame

Smoking in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

8

Volatile vapour

Malfunction (during spillage or drying, and insufficient ventilation)

Outside the spray booth

Various

Ignition sources outside the booth

Various

Various

9

Volatile mist

During normal operation

Inside

the spray gun

Static electricity

No earthing

Likely to occur during malfunction

Low

10

Volatile mist

During normal operation (only near the nozzle of the spray gun)

Inside

the spray booth

Static electricity

Electrostatic charging of the paint spray

Likely to occur during malfunction

Low

11

Volatile mist

During normal operation (only near the nozzle of the spray gun)

Inside

the spray booth

Mechanical sparks

Additional work being performed in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

12

Volatile mist

During normal operation (only near the nozzle of

Inside

the spray

booth

Electrical sparks

Additional work being performed in

Likely to occur during rare

High

 

 

 

the spray gun)

 

 

the booth

malfunction

 

13

Volatile mist

During normal operation (only near the nozzle of the spray gun)

Inside

the spray booth

Hot surface

Additional work being performed in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

14

Volatile mist

During normal operation (only near the nozzle of the spray gun)

Inside

the spray booth

Naked flame

Smoking in the booth

Likely to occur during rare malfunction

High

Table recording hazards identified

Risk Estimation / Risk evaluation

For each hazardous event referred in the hazard identification, the frequency and severity of each risk has been estimated using criteria given in the methodology. The risk level has then been determined using the frequency-severity matrix in Section 5, in the methodology

This first risk estimation does not take into account the preventive and protective measures.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

Occasional

Minor

B

2

Remote

Minor

C

3

Remote

Minor

C

4

Remote

Minor

C

5

Remote

Minor

C

6

Remote

Minor

C

7

Remote

Minor

C

8

To be considered by user

 

?

9

Remote

Minor

C

10

Remote

Minor

C

11

Remote

Minor

C

12

Remote

Minor

C

13

Remote

Minor

C

14

Remote

Minor

C

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk level

Risk Reduction Option Analysis

Preventive and protective measures have to be applied, to reduce the frequency and/or the severity. The following measures are proposed:

Grounding of all equipment.

Good house keeping:-

Allow no naked flames in or near the spray booth.

Minimise the build-up of paint layering, due to over spray, by regular cleaning.

Maintain all equipment in good condition.

Use equipment that will not produce sparks when performing maintenance. Check for any leaks in the extraction ducting.

Continuous measurement of the concentration of volatiles in the air.

Design the ventilation system to keep the concentration of the volatiles in the air well below the lower explosion limit.

If the air flow stops, or the concentration of volatiles in the air becomes too high, then a warning should be given, or the spray gun could be automatically cut off.

Construct the booth from non-flammable material. Provide easy exit points for operators.

Wear clothing that will not produce static electricity. Provide lighting that cannot be an ignition source.

Only permit paint spraying in the booth, no additional work. Install sprinklers.

Install the booth as far from external ignition sources as possible. Use water based paints and lacquers where applicable.

Provide material able to absorb any spillages.

 

Iteration of the risk assessment procedure

After  the  application  of  these  preventive  and  protective  measures,  a  new  risk estimation and risk evaluation have been made.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

2

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

3

Improbable

Minor

C

4

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

5

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

6

Improbable

Minor

C

7

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

8

To be considered by user

 

?

9

Improbable

Minor

C

10

Improbable

Minor

C

11

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

12

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

13

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

14

Ignition source has been eliminated

 

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk levels after Risk reduction measures

Oil seed extraction unit

Determination of intended use

Extraction is the widely used industrial process to gain special oil products of high quality (crude oils, lecithin etc.).

There are several processing steps before starting the extraction process itself to

prepare the seed, for example, storage, cleaning, dehulling, heating, crushing, pressing. To obtain good extraction results, the preceding preparation of the seeds and the conditions used are important.

The  extraction  process  is  operated  by  using  hexane  as  a  solvent.  Due  to  its characteristics hexane is known as a flammable substance which can form explosive

hexane/air mixtures taking into account miscella as well. Using hexane as a solvent

is recognized as both an economic way of extracting and also hazardous from the point of view of explosive atmospheres occurring.

This application example deals with oil seed extraction unit using hexane covering the process steps on extracting, desolventizing and toasting.

Description of the system

Extraction is the key operating step in the process considered. Natural products

(oilseed) are processed and thus involve continually changing compositions.

Larger oilseed extraction units normally process 2500 t/d. For that they need as energy about 250 kg steam, 12 kWh electrical energy, 18m3 cooling energy between

5 and 10°C and 1,5 kg solvent per 1000 kg oil seed. However, these amounts of

energy depend on the natural composition of oil seed being processed and vary from case by case.

In normal operation the atmosphere is not explosive. The oxygen concentration that is occurs in the gas phase of an extractor in normal operation iis insufficient to form

an explosive atmosphere, provided that there is an equilibrium-vapor pressure and a homogenous gas-concentration distribution. This means that the so-called critical

oxygen concentration is not attained in normal operation.

Schematic diagram of the installation

After seed preparation the extraction is performed in a continuous process. The meal is carried by chambers or boxes inside the closed extractor. The chambers are moved with sieves percolated by hexane heated up to 60° C in opposite directions. Having percolated though the meal, the hexane is collected again and pumped into a next chamber. The meal and the miscella leavie the extractor in different ways.

The miscella then is treated to gain the oil, whereas the meal needs to be desolventized from hexane. Meal conveyors connect the extractor with the toaster

and thus allow ingress of air, propagation of explosive atmospheres, ignition sources

transmission and the spread of fires and explosions. The desolventizing is mainly performed in the toaster which consists of different levels to treat the meal with the energy required at the different stages.

Equipment characteristics

Extractor

consists of separated chambers or boxes;

as a rule, temperatures range from 45 to 63° C in normal operation;

designed to be gas – and liquid proof;

meal conveyor

mechanical system where many ignition sources may occur;

chain-conveyor/screw   conveyor    in   connection with rotary valve;

conducts  meal,  liquid  miscella  and  hexane/air mixtures in normal operation;

provides pre-desolventizing;

toaster

meal is treated on different levels;

on the upper level steam is injected directly, the other levels are operating powered steam to get meal on approximately 100° C;

considered to be the most critical equipment in the extraction process;

Product characteristics

Combustion Properties / Explosion Characteristics of hexane / miscella both fluids are easily flammable;

they can form explosive hexane/air mixtures starting at –26° C

hexane/air mixtures are heavier than air and accumulate in holes, canals, shafts and other deepenings;

fatty hexane/air mixtures thin out in air through convection and diffusion and become explosive mixtures;

the minimum ignition energy of 2.16 mJ of an optimum explosive hexane/air mixture is very low;

also the ignition temperature is very low at 223° C;

hexane cannot be mixed with water and its density is less than that of water. Thus hexane fires cannot be extinguished with water;

there exists related risks due to the combustibility of oilseed, flakes, white oil used for hexane absorption, oil-drenched isolation material and others.

Functional / State Analysis

A functional state analysis of the system is shown in the figure:

Physical state of the substance

 

Unit operations           Energies/operating state

prepared seed

solid meal                      +-      moving of meal by extractor boxes

+-           mechanical energy

liquid miscella and moist meal       +-     percolating of meal with hexane

+-      temperature 60 °C negative pressure

hexane moist meal, liquid miscella

 

+-  conveying of hexane +-           room temperature

and hexane air mixtures

treated meal

  cooling energy

solid meal and hexane in the form of vapor

+-   desolventizing the meal from hexane

+-     injected steam approximately

100 °C

desolventized meal

Functional state analysis of the oil seed extraction system

Hazard Identification

The main risk originates from hexane and the miscella due to their combustion properties and explosion characteristics. The risk of fire is very high according to the wide range of potential ignition sources, and these might be also capable of igniting explosive atmospheres.

The relevant ignition sources and their significance to trigger fires and/or explosions

at air impact are summarized in the following table.

Miscella, liquid hexane and hexane vapors can escape into working areas, if the following conditions are provided in normal operation, incidents or repair works:

the extractor and input devices are overloaded where tightness or exhaustion is insufficient at the same time;

the extractor is opened or de-flanged above the miscella level;

leakage above the miscella level and failure of the operational negative pressure;

opening of the emptied extractor without any internal exhaust;

when discharging residual quantities of moisted meal from the open extractor;

miscella is relieved into open receiving containers;

circulation pumps are leaking;

a sampling valve is opened and not properly tightened;

glassy miscella or hexane pipes, sight glasses or glass panes break;

a flange connection in a miscella or hexane pipe is leaking.

Explosions and/or open fire which have developed in an oil seed extraction unit can spread within aggregates as much as an explosive atmosphere can develop

from air impact as long as the spread is not limited by a protective system. To that end a risky situation could be shifted from one to another unit part and endager the system.

Furthermore, explosion and / or open fires which have developed or spread into working areas will most likely cause further events  that are uncontrollable and will affect the entire plant.

Ignition Sources

Possible

Relevant

(Yes/No)

Significant

(include reason)

Hot surface

Yes

Yes-due to hot walls and frictions

Flames and hot gases (including hot particles)

Yes

Yes-can provide sufficient energy

Mechanically generated sparks

Yes

Yes-because of transport means

Electrical apparatus

Yes

Yes-in case of incidents etc.

Stray electric currents, cathodic corrosion protection

No

 

Static electricity:

 

 

Corona discharges

Yes

No- insufficient energy

Brush discharges

Yes

No- insufficient energy

Propagating brush discharges

No

 

Cone discharges

No

 

Spark discharges

Yes

Yes-can provide sufficient energy

Lightning

No

 

Radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic waves from 104 Hz to 3 x 1012 Hz

No

 

Electromagnetic waves from 3 x 1011 Hz to 3 x 1015 Hz

No

 

Ionizing radiation

No

 

Ultrasonics

No

 

Adiabatic compression and shock waves

No

 

Exothermic reactions, including self- ignition of dusts

Yes

Yes-can provide sufficient energy

Table of ignition sources

 

 

Explosive Atmosphere

Ignition Source

Ref.

Type

Frequency of

 

occurrence or release

Location

Type

Cause

Likelihood

Effectiveness

1

Explosive hexane/air mixtures

not likely to occur in normal operation but in cases where air is sucked in (filling, discharge)

extractor input

mechanically generated sparks

Extractor is overloaded

Not likely to occur in normal operation, but during malfunction, blockages etc.

high due to energy level involved

2

Explosive hexane/air mixtures

not likely to occur in normal operation but in cases where air is sucked in (filling, discharge)

inside extractor

static electricity

insulated metal parts

not likely to occur in normal operation

high or low depending on the way of discharging

3

Explosive hexane/air mixtures

not likely to occur in normal operation but in cases where air is sucked in (filling, discharge)

inside extractor

hot surface

overheating of extractor walls

not likely to occur in normal operation but in case of incidence

high relating to self-ignition processes

4

Explosive hexane/air mixtures

not likely to occur in normal operation but due to air impact

inside meal conveyor

hot particles

smouldering products

not likely to occur in normal operation but during transmission

high depending on energy level involved

5

Explosive hexane/air mixtures

not likely to occur in normal operation

inside meal conveyor

mechanically generated sparks

rubbing of driving elements on housing

not likely to occur in normal operation but during malfunction

low due to slow conveyor speed

6

Hexane in the form of vapor

not likely to occur in normal operation due to low oxygen – concentration

inside toaster

hot surface

overheated toaster walls

not likely to occur in normal operation ;

 

temperature monitoring not properly working

high, as surface temperature > ignition temperature

Table recording hazards identified

 

Risk assessment technique

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Hazard  and  Operability  Study  (HAZOP)

applicable  to  complex  items  of  process plant /

 

What – If? Analysis

Explosive hexane / air mixtures develop:

 

during cooling, recovery and opening of the unit

during the filling of the empty extractor with hexane / especially distinct and long-

term if the hexane is cold

in case of incidents within the unit, if air can   get    into   unit   because   of   leaks,

breakdown or maloperation

in case of drip-leakage during sampling

 

Task Analysis / Maintenance Analysis

Explosive hexane / air mixtures develop:

 

if hexane and/or miscella is drained into open  receivers,  i.  e.  not  into  a  closed stop-system from the extractor, nor drained from destillation apparatus, condensators and hexane / water separators

if  meal which is still hexane-moisted  is

discharged from the desolventizer

hexane-, miscella– or meal-conducting apparatus is opened and emptied

Check List for Ignition Sources

Relevant  ignition  sources  for  fire  and

explosion in working areas and product- conducting unit parts:

self-ignition fires in oil-drenched isolations of hot-product-pipelines; rubbing friction;

overheated        bearings;        electrostatic discharges; defect electrical apparatus

Application of risk assessment techniques

Risk Estimation / Risk Evaluation

For each hazardous event referred in the hazard identification, the frequency and severity of each risk has been estimated using criteria given in the methodology. The risk level has then been determined using the frequency-severity matrix in Section 5 of the methodology.

This first risk estimation does not take into account the preventive and protective measures.

 

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

occasional

major

B

2

remote

major

B

3

remote

major

B

4

occasional

major

B

5

occasional

major

B

6

remote

major

B

 

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk levels

Risk Reduction Option Analysis

Contributions to reduce the risk should consider the following measures:

design measures for the entire oil seed extraction unit, e. g.

the unit consists of inflammable materials or those which are hardly flammable;

is equipped with an emergency-power supply,

especially the MSR-plant, cooling and ventilation system;

is gas – and liquid proof;

is equipped with pressure switches to control the permissible pressure range and deviations;

provides valves or means to plug in blank-off flanges between hexane-conducting unit parts

technical measures for individual unit parts, e. g.

The  extractor  posses  an  automatic  overpressure  compensation  as  well  as warning devices. Meal discharge is controlled by a level measuring device. Gas- shuttle pipes are supplied with explosion barriers. Valves or taps can only be opened with special tools. The impact of air together with the flake steam can be limited through a stuffing screw or gas-proof rotary valve.

The meal conveyor has a speed less than 1,0 m/s. The driving force is limited and controlled by hardware. There may further be a redundant control to keep temperature           (60°           C)           in           the           screw           conveyors. Before the apparatus is opened to remove adhesions or cloggings it must be separated gas-proof from the plant directly at the product entry and discharge so that hexane can not reach working at the same time.

The toaster is equipped with an automatic safety device to control temperature, pressure and liquid levels.

The apparatus is regularly controlled, especially prior to being opened so that any long-term meal adhesions are detected in time.

The toaster is to be equipped with appropriate fire extinguishing devices.

In general, the above-mentioned risk reduction options have to be applied all of them to achieve acceptable risk levels.

In  addition,  further  safety  measures  have  to  be  taken  for  special  operational conditions  like  start-up,  shut-down,  opening,  discharging,  repairs  including appropriate instructions thereof.

Iteration of the risk assessment procedure

After the application of these preventive and protective measures, a new risk estimation and risk evaluation have been made.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

remote

minor

C

2

improbable

minor

C

3

remote

minor

C

4

remote

minor

C

5

remote

minor

C

6

remote

minor

C

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk levels after Risk reduction measures

Spray Dryer for Milk

Determination of intended use

Spray Drying is the widely used industrial process involving particle formation and drying. It is suited for the continuous production of dry solids in either powder, granulate or agglomerate form from liquid feedstocks such as emulsions and suspension.

Spray Drying involves the atomization of the liquid feedstock into a spray of droplets

and contacting the droplets with hot air in a drying chamber.

The sprays are produced by either rotary or nozzle atomizers. All systems can be provided  with  post-treatment  equipment,  for  example:  fluid  bed  dryer/cooler,

agglomerator, de-duster and conveyor.

Description of the system

Atomization plays a central role in the process. The formation of sprays having the required droplet size distribution is vital to both the operation and the explosive atmospheres in the form of a cloud of combustible dust occurring.

The selection of rotary atomizer or nozzle type depends on the feed properties and powder specification. The contact between spray droplets and drying air controls the evaporation rate and product temperatures in the dryer. There are three basic modes of contact:

Co-current:

Drying air and particles move through the drying chamber in the same direction. Product temperatures on discharge from the dryer are lower than the exhaust air temperature.

Counter-current:

Drying air and particles move through the drying chamber in opposite directions. The  temperature  of  the  powder  leaving  the  dryer  is  usually  higher  than  the exhaust air temperature.

Mixed-flow:

Particle movement through the drying chamber experiences both co-current and counter-current phases.

In Milk Powder Spray Dryers a co-current airflow pattern is almost exclusively used. The other modes are used mainly with products having high heat stability.

Exhaust air is subject to a cleaning process in cyclones, bag filters, and occasionally wet scrubbers.

The remaining part of this application example deals with a specific Milk Powder Spray Dryer. All equipment and its components have stainless steel housing or are mounted in a stainless steel casing.

Schematic diagram of the installation

air in

product inlet

air out

drying air cooling air

chamber

cyclone

fluid bed product outlet

filter

The spray dryer transforms the feed, which is milk concentrate into a powder in one continuous operation.

The feed is pumped to the rotary atomizer machine located in the ceiling air disperser at the centre of the chamber roof. The atomizer produces a spray of droplets by passing the feed through a vaned wheel rotating at high speed. The spray of droplets produced by the atomizer is immediately contacted by and mixed with hot drying air entering the drying chamber in a flow pattern created by the ceiling air disperser.

Each droplet in the spray is turned into a solid particle by drying while suspended in the drying air. A high rate of collisions between particles produces agglomerates that form the powder product. Product separation from the drying air takes mainly place at the base of the drying chamber.

The powder is discharged continuously from the drying chamber. The powder passes into a fluid bed where final drying and cooling of the powder takes place. Small amounts of fines pass with the exhaust air from the drying chamber and the fluid bed to be collected in cyclones. A bag filter completes the cleaning of the exhaust air leaving the spray dryer.

The fine fraction of the powder collected by the cyclones is recycled to the drying system to participate in the agglomeration process. The re-entry point is in the drying section of the fluid bed. The fine powder is conveyed in a pneumatic conveying system.

Equipment characteristics

The feed pump is an eccentric helical pump of rotatory type working according to the positive displacement principle.

The rotary atomizer is a Niro proprietary design rated at 24 kW.

The heating system is indirect steam, 5000 kW, automatic control, max 220° C. The air blower of the pneumatic conveying system is of the Rootes type.

The drying chamber has the following geometry:

Diameter                           7.0 m

Cylindrical height   6.3 m Total height                                   15.0 m Cone 60°

Pneumatic hammer system

The milk spray dryer is designed to operate at the following temperature levels: Inlet air temperature                                     200° C

Outlet air temperature        90° C Feed Temperature                        40° C

The exhaust system comprise the following components: Main Cyclones                  2 off    Diameter 2.0 m

FB cyclone   1 off    Diameter 1.4 m

Bag filter

Exhaust fan

Product characteristics

Combustion Properties and Explosion Characteristics of milk powder

Particle size (median)

80-100    m

Explosibility

(modified Hartmann apparatus < 63   m)

Yes

Max explosion overpressure (pmax)

6 to 7 bar

max rate of pressure rise (KST-value)

80-130 bar  m  s-1

Minimum ignition energy (MIE)

> 50 mJ

Minimum           ignition           temperature of a dust cloud

450 to 600° C

Lower explosion limit (LEL)

60 to 125 g  m-3

Glowing (layer ignition temperature)

320 to 350° C

Note: This table contains approximate values. Properties may vary from product to product due to the amount of fat, glucose etc.

Functional / State Analysis

A functional state analysis of the milk spray drying system is shown in the figure:

Physical state of the substance

Unit operations           Energies/operating state

Storage of liquid feed

Liquid                         +-    Pumping of liquid to atomizer

+-            Temperature 40C Liquid pressure < 10 bar

Cloud of droplets                +-   Atomization of liquid +-          Temperature ~ 40 C

by atomizer

Atmospheric pressure

Vapour and  powder particles       +-   Drying of droplets

 

+-          Temperature < 90 C Atmospheric pressure

Vapour and  powder particles       +-  Drying and cooling of +-          Temperature < 90 C

Powder particles in

fluid bed

Atmospheric pressure

Powder particles                 +- Pneumatic

conveying of powder

particles

+-          Temperature < 90 C Atmospheric pressure

Powder                        +-  Discharge of powder +-          Temperature < 50 C Atmospheric pressure

Storage of powder

Functional state analysis of the spray drying system

Hazard Identification

Taking into account both units and components considered safety-relevant as well as combustion properties and explosion characteristics of milk powder, the occurrence of an explosive atmosphere must be anticipated. Further, milk powder may under certain circumstances be capable of undergoing exothermic processes leading to self-ignition of fires.

An atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible milk powder in air is present continuously. The concentration of milk powder is, however, usually under the lower explosion limit (LEL). It is likely to occur occasionally in normal operation.

In case of dust, it is difficult to achieve the objective of avoiding explosive atmospheres  by  limiting  the  concentration  since  dust-air  mixtures  are  usually

inhomogeneous. Calculation of dust-concentration from the total amount of dust and

the total equipment leads to erroneous results. Local dust concentrations can be present that differs greatly from the globally calculated ones.

Deposits of milk powder may under certain circumstances be compacted in layers of more than 60 mm thickness. When such layers are subject to temperatures over 80-

90    C  for  a  period  of  more  than  20  hours  an  exothermic  reaction  may  cause smoldering. A smoldering lump can ignite a fire, which in turn can ignite an explosion High temperatures on drying air inlet devices or atomizer systems without adequate cooling can also lead to the initiation of smouldering and / or burning.

Consequently the prevention of fire sources is getting highest priority. Of course, this includes the avoidance of any ignition sources that might be also capable of igniting explosive atmospheres.

Operational  limits  are  determined  by  the  combustion  properties  and  explosion characteristics of milk powder in combination with a safety margin.

The ”Hazard Identification” is summarized in the following tables:

Table of Ignition sources

Table recording hazards identified

Ignition Sources

Possible

Relevant

(Yes/No)

Significant

(include reason)

Hot surface

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Flames and hot gases (including hot particles)

No

 

Mechanically generated sparks

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Electrical apparatus

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Stray electric currents, cathodic corrosion protection

No

 

Static electricity:

 

 

Corona discharges

Yes

No – insufficient energy

Brush discharges

Yes

No – insufficient energy

Propagating brush discharges

No

 

Cone discharges

No

 

Spark discharges

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Lightning

No

 

Radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic waves from 104 Hz to 3 x 1012 Hz

No

 

Electromagnetic waves from 3 x 1011 Hz to 3 x 1015 Hz

No

 

Ionizing radiation

No

 

Ultrasonics

No

 

Adiabatic compression and shock waves

No

 

Exothermic reactions, including self- ignition of dusts

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Table of Ignition sources

 

 

Explosive Atmosphere

Ignition Source

 

Ref

.

Type

Frequency of occurrence or release

Location

Type

Cause

Likelihood

Effective- ness of ignition sources

1

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Inside chamber cone

Self- ignition

Deposits due to blockage problems

Not likely to occur in normal operation, but, if it does occur, will persist for a long period

High with respect to release of fire

2

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Below chamber roof

Hot surfaces

Deposits due to overload of atomizer

Not likely to occur in normal operation

High due to enhance- ment of

self-ignition process

3

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Below chamber roof

Friction sparks

During malfunction of atomizer

Not likely to occur in normal operation

High with respect to release of fire

4

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Inside chamber

Electrical apparatus

During malfunction or short- circuit of measuring and control equipment

Present continuously or for long periods. Frequently during malfunction or short- circuit of control equipment

High, depending on energy levels involved, i.e. lamps

5

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Connecting parts between units and components considered safety relevant

Electro- static discharge

Insulated metal parts due to wearing out or bad maintenance

Not likely to occur in normal operation, but, if it does occur, will persist for a long period

High or low, depending on way of discharging

6

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Fluid bed, filter

Self- ignition

Layers, deposits or heaps of combustible dust

Not likely to occur in normal operation

High with respect to release of fire

7

Cloud of Combust- ible dust

Present in normal operation

Pneumatic conveying system

Self- ignition

Layers, deposits of combustible dust

Not likely to occur in normal operation

High with respect to release of fire

Table recording hazards identified

Risk Estimation / Risk evaluation

Referring to the ”Frequency-Severity Matrix relating to risk levels” in Section 5 of the methodology, risk in terms of explosion safety is made up of the following elements, provided, that no preventive measures are applied:

Severity is considered ”major”, because first and foremost the effectiveness of ignition sources are classified high in most of the cases on record and the complexity of plant given

Frequency is considered ”occasional” mainly due to the fact, that the explosion event is likely to occur sometime in life of a spray drying system.

These classifications initially lead to risk level ”B” of the Matrix.

Risk assessment technique

Factors/relationships which could influence the risk

Hazard  and  Operability

Study (HAZOP) applicable to complex items of process plant

Dust concentration in the chamber is the quotient of dust amount (kg/h) and air current (m3/h).

In the cone of the chamber dust concentration increases in the same measure as the volume thereof decreases. The discharge of powder reduces the relevant dust concentration up to 80

%.

Concept Safety Review / Concept Hazard Analysis

Relationship     between      explosion      protection measures and hygiene aspects:

Priority  must  be  given  to  preventive  measures rather       than      additional      installations.      The underpressure in the plant favours hygiene risks. Basis of safety is to be achieved by the avoidance of  ignition  sources,  because  the  occurrence  of explosive atmospheres in the form of a cloud of combustible milk powder and its deposits cannot be eliminated.

It is critical for the atomizer from a safety point of view to be:

Non-dripping

Connected to a cooling system

Without vibrations.

Task  Analysis  /  Human

Reliability Analysis

The chamber must be checked at regular intervals. The results must be subject to documentation.

The extent of explosive atmosphere zoning depends very much on the way, the system is operated, e. g. evaporative capacity.

Selection and training of qualified staff is required for the specific tasks.

Removal of dust deposits needs to be done at regular intervals.

Application of risk assessment techniques

For each hazardous event referred in the hazard identification, the frequency and severity of each risk has been estimated using criteria given in the methodology. The risk level has then been determined using the frequency-severity matrix in Section 5 in the methodology

This first risk estimation does not take into account the preventive and protective measures.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

Occasional

Major

B

2

Remote

Minor

C

3

Remote

Minor

C

4

Remote

Minor

C

5

Remote

Minor

C

6

Occasional

Minor

C

7

Occasional

Minor

C

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk level

Risk Evaluation

Risk level ”B” is an intermediate level and requires some form of risk reduction measures to make the risk acceptable. In the case of risk level ”B” organisational risk reduction measures will not be sufficient. Consequently the step of risk reduction option analysis giving priority to design measures has to be implemented for spray drying systems processing combustible milk powder.

Risk Reduction Option Analysis

Preventive and protective measures have to be applied, to reduce the frequency and/or the severity. The following measures are proposed:

The greatest contributions to reduce risk level ”B” down to risk level ”C” or ”D” are changes to the design concept to eliminate fire events as much as possible. Preventive fire protection measures serving at the same time explosion prevention are as follows

Temperature monitoring

Detection of carbon monoxide

Sensor systems for spark detection (infra-red). Fire suppression system

These preventive measures should become part of the inherently safe design of the chamber  but  also  be  considered  for  the  filters  and  the  fluid  beds.  In  addition, protective systems should be applied as a combination of options to approach to a low risk level, for example

Pressure-relief systems or alternative

Explosion suppression systems

The  preventive  and  protective  measures  can  be  joined  to  an  ”explosion  safe package”, for example, detection of carbon monoxide triggering alarms and fire suppression systems and providing shut-down of the plant concerned in time.

Spray Drying Systems are often equipped with features to meet special design specifications, many of which provide an increase of safety at the same time. In this

context, the following features can be mentioned:

Pressure  shock  resistant  drying  chamber  with  venting  or  suppression  for explosion protection

Computerized control systems

Weatherproof finish for outdoor installations

However, it should be recognized that the installation of such features requires a comprehensive approach taking into account the interactions between the equipment and the particular industrial process performed.

Iteration of the risk assessment procedure

After the application of preventive and protective measures, a new risk estimation and risk evaluation have been made.

 

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

Occasional

Minor

C

2

Remote

Minor

C

3

Remote

Minor

C

4

Remote

Minor

C

5

Remote

Minor

C

6

Occasional

Minor

C

7

Occasional

Minor

C

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk levels after Risk reduction measures

Protective system – An explosion venting door

Description of the system

An explosion venting door is an example of a protective system to protect a vessel against the consequences of an explosion. It is designed to open at a pre-determined pressure allowing the explosion inside the vessel to be vented. It consists of the following components:

Door

Frame

Spring mechanism with defined opening pressure

Baffle plate

Vacuum breaker

Determination of intended use

The intended use of the explosion door is to open a defined area at a defined pressure without cracking the door The required vent area to protect a specific vessel is outside the scope of this assessment. The explosion door considered in this example is designed to vent an explosion of a dust/air mixture.

Equipment characteristics

All parts of the explosion venting door are constructed from steel. The relevant parameters that influence the intended use can be subdivided as follows:

Process:

Product, Vessel, Pressure, Temperature, Abrasion, Corrosion

Environment:

Maintenance,  Specification,  Configuration,  Ageing,  Operator,  Weather  conditions

(Freezing, Snow, Wind, Corrosion)

Product characteristics

An explosible dust air atmosphere is present inside the vessel on which the door is fitted.

Hazard identification

An ignition source can be present inside the vessel and cause ignition of the dust / air atmosphere. However the door itself should not act as a source of ignition. Relevant sources of ignition that could arise from the door are electrostatic due to the impact of the dust / air mixture against the door and mechanical friction due to the door opening.

Analysis of possible operating faults

From the wide range of risk assessment techniques presented in the methodology two techniques are selected for hazard identification for this example: What-If- Analysis and Fault-Tree-Analysis.

The keywords for the use of the What-If-Analysis are shown below for one example:

What if...?

Related component

Effect/Hazard

Consequence

... the door do not open at defined overpressure

Door

Vessel cracking

Overpressure to high

 

The What-If-Questions are related to the identified relevant parameters and consider deviations from the normal operation values.

The following graph shows a part of the Fault-Tree-Analysis for the Top event ”No

No opening at defined pressure

Wrong spring configuration

Etc.

 

Jammed spring mechanism

 

 

Insufficient maintenance

 

Human error

The results of the analysis are shown in the following table:

Ref.

Deviation from intended operation

Possible reason

Consequence

1

No opening at defined pressure

Wrong spring mechanism configuration

Overpressure to high

2

No opening at defined pressure

Jammed spring mechanism

Overpressure to high

3

No opening at defined pressure

Insufficient design

Overpressure to high

4

No opening at defined pressure

Unconsidered weather conditions

Opening too early or too late

5

Turnover of the door

Insufficient baffle plate design

Fragmentation

6

Door cracking

Opening pressure to high

Fragmentation

7

Door cracking

Ageing

Fragmentation

8

Door cracking

Wrong door specification

Fragmentation

Risk estimation / evaluation

For each hazardous event referred in the hazard identification, the frequency and severity of each risk has been estimated using criteria given in the methodology. The risk level has then been determined using the frequency-severity matrix in Section 5 in the methodology

 

Ref.

Frequency

Severity

Risk level

1

Remote

Minor

C

2

Occasional

Minor

B

3

Remote

Major

B

4

Remote

Minor

C

5

Remote

Major

B

6

Remote

Major

B

7

Occasional

Major

B

8

Remote

Major

B

Risk reduction methods

Several measures are available to ensure the intended function of the explosion door:

Operating instructions for installation and use including earthing of the door to prevent electrostatic discharges.

Use of design standards (existing, future) Maintain equipment in good condition

Design according to environmental conditions (Protection against ice and snow)

Provided the specified measures have been implemented the risk assessment the risk will be reduced to an acceptable level.

Exhaust System of Gas Engines

Determination of intended use

Gas-fired  engines  are  more  and  more  common  today  mostly  used  for  power generation purposes. The fuel is normally natural gas.

The main purpose of the exhaust system is to transport exhaust gases generated by

the combustion in the gas engines, away from the engines to a safe place into the atmosphere.  In many applications the waste heat is applied by including a boiler in the exhaust system.

Description of the system

Gas-fired engines can vary in capacity and application and the exhaust gas systems vary accordingly. It is common that several engines are operating simultaneously and their exhaust lines end up in a common stack.

In general the exhaust gas system of a single engine consists of four parts:

1. a pipeline between the engine and silencer or boiler and silencer

2. a silencer or boiler and silencer

3. a pipeline between the silencer or boiler and silencer and into the stack

4. stack (very often the pipelines just continue independently in the stack)

The first pipeline is often, but not always, relatively short. The exhaust gases emerge from the top of the engine and therefore the pipeline consists of an initial vertical pipe piece followed by a 90° bend and a horizontal pipe.

The boilers, which are installed as a part of the exhaust line, are varying in shape as well. Boilers are used especially when the engines are installed in power plants. Their main use is to apply waste heat in the exhaust gases. The casing of the boilers is generally considerably wider than the diameter of the inlet piping. The boilers act as heat exchangers and accordingly each boiler contains a number of pipes for heat transfer from the hot exhaust gases to the water flowing through these pipes.

Also the silencers are wider than the applied exhaust piping.  The diameter varies typically up to 2.0 times the diameter of exhaust piping. The length-to-diameter ratio of silencers may vary up to 4.  Silencers have internals to damp acoustics generated in the engines. These internals often consist of a set of plates positioned cross flow in the silencer.

The secondary pipeline is often very long (up to 25 time the diameter). The pipeline contains one or several bends varying in angle. In general this pipeline is orientated horizontally up to the stack where it turns vertically.

The entire exhaust gas system is typically designed to withstand pressures of up to 2 bar.

Characteristics of natural gas

The properties of natural gas vary with the composition.  The main component of natural gas is methane (between 60-96 % v/v).  Other components are higher alkanes (ethane, propane) (up to 30 % v/v) and inert gases (rest).

Based on the properties of methane and the other components of natural gas the properties can be estimated to be as follows:

Auto-ignition temperature             > 460 ºC Minimum ignition energy                                                           > 0.25 mJ Explosion limits                                                           LEL: 4 – 7 % v/v

UEL 13 – 17 % v/v

Maximum explosion pressure      approx. 7 bar

KG-value                                           approx. 60 bar.m/s

Functional / State Analysis

A functional state analysis of the exhaust system is shown in the figure below:

Physical state of the substance

Unit operations

Energies/operating state

 

 

 

 

Gaseous           +- Gaseous           +- Gaseous                        +-

Start-up

 

 

 

Transport of gas into engine/ ignition

 

 

 

 

Normal operation with normal loading

 

 

 

 

Operation under off- loading conditions

 

 

 

 

Out of operation

 

 

 

 

+-    Room temperature/pressure in exhaust system, gas pressure 30

bar

 

 

 

+-   385/ 500 ºC in exhaust system, pressure approx. 1 bar, gas

pressure 1-3 bar

 

 

 

+-   385/ 500 ºC in exhaust system, pressure approx. 1 bar, gas

pressure 1-3 bar

Functional state analysis of the spray drying system

Remark: The unit operations really happen upstream of the exhaust system while operating the engine.  The exhaust gas system is just taking the consequences of unit operations upstream.

Hazard Identification

Under normal conditions the gas in the exhaust gas system will consist of hot combustion gases and there will be no hazard but there are two conditions where unburned gas may reach the exhaust system:

During the start-up procedure of the engines: if ignition of the gas in the cylinder does not  occur  unburned  mixture  may  enter  the  exhaust  gas  system  during  several strokes.

A second situation where unburned flammable gas-air mixtures may reach the exhaust system is during off-load running due to poor combustion in the engine.

These situations prevail for a relatively short time but can result in a considerable part of the exhaust system being filled with flammable gas-air.   An important characteristic is the fact that the natural gas is mixed with air in the engine, which then is transported into the exhaust gas system.  For environmental reasons the natural gas-air mixtures applied in the engines are lean.

Ignition sources in the exhaust gas system are only arising from the combustion in the engines.  There are otherwise no ignition sources such as hot surfaces, electric equipment, electrostatic discharges etc. inside the pipes.

There are two types of ignition sources arising from the engines: hot gases and hot particles.

The hot combustion gases have a temperature varying from 385  C to 500  C depending on the capacity of the engine.  The auto-ignition temperature for methane is 540   C but for natural gas the auto-ignition temperature may be considerably lower: relatively small amounts of higher hydrocarbons (> 10 % v/v) may already lower the auto-ignition temperature by 60  C. Hence for some engines and for some mixture compositions ignition cannot be excluded.  On the other hand it should be mentioned that the auto-ignition temperature of a hydrocarbon fuel normally is measured for rich mixtures.   For lean mixtures the auto-ignition temperature is considerably higher. The likelihood for ignition by exhaust gases is therefore considered to be very small.

The most likely ignition source of the gas mixture in the exhaust gas system is hot particles emerging from the engine. The temperature of hot particles can vary from a few hundred degrees up to 1000 °C.

The ”Hazard Identification” is summarised in the following tables: Table of Ignition sources

Table recording hazards identified

 

Ignition Sources

Possible

Relevant

(Yes/No)

Significant

(include reason)

Hot surface

No

 

Flames and hot gases (including hot particles)

Yes

Yes – can provide sufficient energy

Mechanically generated sparks

No

 

Electrical apparatus

No

 

Stray electric currents, cathodic corrosion protection

No

 

Static electricity:

No

 

Lightning

No

 

Radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic waves from 104 Hz to 3 x 1012 Hz

No

 

Electromagnetic waves from 3 x 1011 Hz to 3 x 1015 Hz

No

 

Ionizing radiation

No

 

Ultrasonics

No

 

Adiabatic compression and shock waves

No

 

Exothermic reactions

No

 

Table of Ignition sources

 

 

Explosive Atmosphere

Ignition Source

 

Ref

.

Type

Frequency of occurrence or release

Location

Type

Cause

Likelihood

Effective- ness of ignition sources

1

Natural gas after

ignition failure in engine

Only during start-up procedure (probable)

In exhaust close to engine

Combustion gases

Ignition of gas in engine after initial failures

May happen during start- up (low probability)

Low

2

Natural gas after

ignition

failure in engine

Only during start-up procedure (probable)

In exhaust close to engine

Hot particles

Ignition of gas in engine after initial failures

Happens every now and then during start- up

Medium

3

Incomplete burning in engine gives rise

to flammable atmosphere in exhaust

Only during off-loading running (occasionally

Entire exhaust

Combustion gases

During off- loading running conditions

May happen (low probability)

Low

4

Incomplete burning in engine gives rise

to

flammable atmosphere in exhaust

Only during off-loading running (occasionally

Entire exhaust

Hot particles

During off- loading running conditions equipment

Does happen (medium probability)

Medium

Table recording hazards identified

Risk Estimation / Risk evaluation

Based on the hazard identification as presented above an estimation of the risk of these operations was carried out using the frequency-severity matrix given in the methodology.

To highlight the thoughts behind the severity of events the following:

Considering the severity of explosions in the exhaust gas system one should first of all consider the strength of the pipes, which is 2 bar at a maximum and the potential pressures generated by an explosion. The consequences of explosions in pipes are directly related to the mixture reactivity and to turbulence present in the mixture at the moment of ignition and the turbulence generated by the combustion itself. The latter could cause a positive feedback mechanism that will continue as long as there are walls for generation of turbulence and as long as there is a flammable atmosphere. In pipes this process may even lead to a transition to detonation.  For normal hydrocarbons (ethane, propane, butane) a typical distance to obtain a transition to detonation  is  L/D=60  for  straight  pipes.    For  methane  this  distance  is  longer. Maximum flame speeds of approximately 150 m/s in a 30 m long, 400 mm pipe open at one end (ignition at the closed end) have been reported. Pressures at such flame speeds are in the order of 0.5 bar.  Similar results were found in a 1400 mm pipe for the same distance of flame propagation. The mixture in these tests was initially quiescent, i.e. not flowing.  In case the pipe contains bends the distance for reaching pressures above 2 bar may be considerably shorter.

The positive feedback mechanism will be considerably stronger when obstructions are present inside the pipe.   The turbulence generated ahead of the flame will be much more intense and as a result high pressures are generated at much shorter total propagation distance than in an empty pipe. The overpressure-distance relationship depends strongly on the obstacle density (number, size, degree of blockage) and obstacle layout (relative positions).  This increase of the effectivity of the positive feedback mechanism will apply to the silencers and boilers included in the exhaust gas systems.

The consequences of explosions of natural gas-air mixtures are expected to be considerably more severe than those for mixtures arising in the exhaust system due to incomplete combustion.

The consequences of pipe failure would be associated with pressure waves causing damage to the building in which the exhaust system, the boiler and silencer are located, potential injuries to people due to these pressure waves and due to the flames emerging from the exhaust system.  The exhaust system itself would be heavily damaged, leaving the engines out of operation over a long time.

Application of risk assessment techniques

For each hazardous event referred in the hazard identification, the frequency and severity of each risk has been estimated using criteria given in the methodology. The risk level has then been determined using the frequency-severity matrix in Section 5 in the methodology

This first risk estimation does not take into account the preventive and protective measures.

Reference

Frequency

Severity

Risk Level

1

Remote

Major

B

2

Occasional

Major

B

3

Improbable

Minor

C

4

Remote

Minor

C

Table of frequency and severity of events and resulting risk level

Risk Evaluation

The table shows that all events fall in the categories B or C, which are intermediate levels. Risk reduction measures are necessary to make the risk acceptable.

Risk Reduction Option Analysis

The risk reduction measures could be a combination of several measures often a combination of measures reducing the likelihood of ignition and of those limiting the consequences.

Due to the severity of the consequences of an explosion the reduction of likelihood of ignition will not always lead to changes in the categorisation as proposed by the methodology.     The  residual  risk  may  still  be  too  high.  Nevertheless  it  is recommended to apply such measures as well to reduce the number of events.

The likelihood of ignition of a mixture of natural gas and air in the exhaust gas system can be reduced considerably by quenching hot particles emerging from the engine: the use of systems consisting of a detector and an extinguishing unit to quench sparks should be considered

There are several techniques to protect the exhaust gas system against the consequences of explosions , viz.:

explosion relief,

explosion proof construction

flame arresters or extinguishing barriers.

Considering explosion relief one should also consider the problems with respect to design of this type of protection.  Choice of the size of the vent openings and the location of these is not straightforward.  One should know the design pressure of the pipes and one should reckon with external effects: flames emerging from the vent openings and pressure build-up in the room into which the venting occurs.  The use of additional vent ducts or flame arresters onto the vent openings should be considered.

Considering explosion proof construction one should be able to predict the maximum pressure in the exhaust system.  Transition to detonation and the high associated pressures has to be considered as well.

Application of flame arresters would stop flames resulting from ignition upstream of the flame arrester.  As hot particles may be an ignition source the location of these arresters should be considered with care. The flame arrester should be chosen according to the conditions prevailing in the engine: temperature and an optimal methane/air mixture.  The arrester should be explosion resistant; i.e. it should be able to withstand the maximum explosion pressure generated in the part of the exhaust gas system upstream of the arrester and the drag due to the velocity through the arrester.

Special arrangements are available to clean flame arresters in case of pollution of the arrester by soot particles generated in the engine.

Another possibility is the use of an extinguishing barrier. As for the flame arrester location of the barrier should be chosen with care.

The proposed measures for limitation of the consequences of explosions would lead to  reducing  the  severity  to  minor  or  even  negligible  depending  on  the  solution chosen.

English

harmonized standards for machinery - OJ C 220 of 11/07/2014

11.7.2014   

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

C 220/1


Commission communication in the framework of the implementation of the Directive 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 May 2006 on machinery, and amending Directive 95/16/EC (recast)

(Publication of titles and references of harmonised standards under Union harmonisation legislation)

(Text with EEA relevance)

2014/C 220/01

ESO

Reference and title of the harmonised standard

(and reference document)

First publication OJ

Reference of superseded standard

Date of cessation of presumption of conformity of superseded standard

Standards developed by CEN

A-type standards

A-type standards specify basic concepts, terminology and design principles applicable to all categories of machinery. Application of such standards alone, although providing an essential framework for the correct application of the Machinery Directive, is not sufficient to ensure conformity with the relevant essential health and safety requirements of the Directive and therefore does not give a full presumption of conformity.

CEN

EN ISO 12100:2010

Safety of machinery — General principles for design — Risk assessment and risk reduction (ISO 12100:2010)

8.4.2011

EN ISO 12100-1:2003

EN ISO 12100-2:2003

EN ISO 14121-1:2007

Date expired

(30.11.2013)

B-type standards

B-type standards deal with specific aspects of machinery safety or specific types of safeguard that can be used across a wide range of categories of machinery. Application of the specifications of B-type standards confers a presumption of conformity with the essential health and safety requirements of the Machinery Directive that they cover when a C-type standard or the manufacturer's risk assessment shows that a technical solution specified by the B-type standard is adequate for the particular category or model of machinery concerned. Application of B-type standards that give specifications for safety components that are independently placed on the market confers a presumption of conformity for the safety components concerned and for the essential health and safety requirements covered by the standards.

CEN

EN 349:1993+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Minimum gaps to avoid crushing of parts of the human body

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 547-1:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human body measurements — Part 1: Principles for determining the dimensions required for openings for whole body access into machinery

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 547-2:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human body measurements — Part 2: Principles for determining the dimensions required for access openings

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 547-3:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human body measurements — Part 3: Anthropometric data

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 574:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Two-hand control devices — Functional aspects — Principles for design

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 614-1:2006+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Ergonomic design principles — Part 1: Terminology and general principles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 614-2:2000+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Ergonomic design principles — Part 2: Interactions between the design of machinery and work tasks

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 626-1:1994+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Reduction of risks to health from hazardous substances emitted by machinery — Part 1: Principles and specifications for machinery manufacturers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 626-2:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Reduction of risk to health from hazardous substances emitted by machinery — Part 2: Methodology leading to verification procedures

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 842:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Visual danger signals — General requirements, design and testing

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 894-1:1997+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Ergonomics requirements for the design of displays and control actuators — Part 1: General principles for human interactions with displays and control actuators

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 894-2:1997+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Ergonomics requirements for the design of displays and control actuators — Part 2: Displays

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 894-3:2000+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Ergonomics requirements for the design of displays and control actuators — Part 3: Control actuators

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 894-4:2010

Safety of machinery — Ergonomics requirements for the design of displays and control actuators — Part 4: Location and arrangement of displays and control actuators

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 953:1997+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Guards — General requirements for the design and construction of fixed and movable guards

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 981:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — System of auditory and visual danger and information signals

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1005-1:2001+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human physical performance — Part 1: Terms and definitions

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1005-2:2003+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human physical performance — Part 2: Manual handling of machinery and component parts of machinery

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1005-3:2002+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human physical performance — Part 3: Recommended force limits for machinery operation

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1005-4:2005+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Human physical performance — Part 4: Evaluation of working postures and movements in relation to machinery

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1032:2003+A1:2008

Mechanical vibration — Testing of mobile machinery in order to determine the vibration emission value

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1037:1995+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Prevention of unexpected start-up

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 1: Selection of test methods

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-2:2006+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 2: Tracer gas method for the measurement of the emission rate of a given pollutant

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-3:2006+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 3: Test bench method for the measurement of the emission rate of a given pollutant

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-4:1996+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 4: Capture efficiency of an exhaust system — Tracer method

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-6:1998+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 6: Separation efficiency by mass, unducted outlet

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-7:1998+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 7: Separation efficiency by mass, ducted outlet

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-8:1998+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 8: Pollutant concentration parameter, test bench method

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-9:1998+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 9: Pollutant concentration parameter, room method

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1093-11:2001+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Evaluation of the emission of airborne hazardous substances — Part 11: Decontamination index

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1127-1:2011

Explosive atmospheres — Explosion prevention and protection — Part 1: Basic concepts and methodology

18.11.2011

EN 1127-1:2007

31.7.2014

CEN

EN 1299:1997+A1:2008

Mechanical vibration and shock — Vibration isolation of machines — Information for the application of source isolation

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1837:1999+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Integral lighting of machines

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3741:2010

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Precision methods for reverberation test rooms (ISO 3741:2010)

8.4.2011

EN ISO 3741:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 3743-1:2010

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Engineering methods for small movable sources in reverberant fields — Part 1: Comparison method for a hard-walled test room (ISO 3743-1:2010)

8.4.2011

EN ISO 3743-1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 3743-2:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Engineering methods for small, movable sources in reverberant fields — Part 2: Methods for special reverberation test rooms (ISO 3743-2:1994)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3744:2010

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Engineering methods for an essentially free field over a reflecting plane (ISO 3744:2010)

8.4.2011

EN ISO 3744:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 3745:2012

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Precision methods for anechoic rooms and hemi-anechoic rooms (ISO 3745:2012)

5.6.2012

EN ISO 3745:2009

Date expired

(30.9.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 3746:2010

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Survey method using an enveloping measurement surface over a reflecting plane (ISO 3746:2010)

8.4.2011

EN ISO 3746:2009

Date expired

(30.6.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 3747:2010

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound pressure — Engineering/survey methods for use in situ in a reverberant environment (ISO 3747:2010)

8.4.2011

EN ISO 3747:2009

Date expired

(30.6.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 4413:2010

Hydraulic fluid power — General rules and safety requirements for systems and their components (ISO 4413:2010)

8.4.2011

EN 982:1996+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.11.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 4414:2010

Pneumatic fluid power — General rules and safety requirements for systems and their components (ISO 4414:2010)

8.4.2011

EN 983:1996+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.11.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 4871:2009

Acoustics — Declaration and verification of noise emission values of machinery and equipment (ISO 4871:1996)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 5136:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound power radiated into a duct by fans and other air-moving devices — In-duct method (ISO 5136:2003)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 7235:2009

Acoustics — Laboratory measurement procedures for ducted silencers and air-terminal units — Insertion loss, flow noise and total pressure loss (ISO 7235:2003)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 7731:2008

Ergonomics — Danger signals for public and work areas — Auditory danger signals (ISO 7731:2003)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 9614-1:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound intensity — Part 1: Measurement at discrete points (ISO 9614-1:1993)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 9614-3:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound intensity — Part 3: Precision method for measurement by scanning (ISO 9614-3:2002)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11145:2008

Optics and photonics — Lasers and laser-related equipment — Vocabulary and symbols (ISO 11145:2006)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11161:2007

Safety of machinery — Integrated manufacturing systems — Basic requirements (ISO 11161:2007)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 11161:2007/A1:2010

26.5.2010

 

Date expired

(30.9.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11200:2009

Acoustics — Noise emitted by machinery and equipment — Guidelines for the use of basic standards for the determination of emission sound pressure levels at a work station and at other specified positions (ISO 11200:1995, including Cor 1:1997)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11201:2010

Acoustics — Noise emitted by machinery and equipment — Determination of emission sound pressure levels at a work station and at other specified positions in an essentially free field over a reflecting plane with negligible environmental corrections (ISO 11201:2010)

20.10.2010

EN ISO 11201:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11202:2010

Acoustics — Noise emitted by machinery and equipment — Determination of emission sound pressure levels at a work station and at other specified positions applying approximate environmental corrections (ISO 11202:2010)

20.10.2010

EN ISO 11202:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11203:2009

Acoustics — Noise emitted by machinery and equipment — Determination of emission sound pressure levels at a work station and at other specified positions from the sound power level (ISO 11203:1995)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11204:2010

Acoustics — Noise emitted by machinery and equipment — Determination of emission sound pressure levels at a work station and at other specified positions applying accurate environmental corrections (ISO 11204:2010)

20.10.2010

EN ISO 11204:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11205:2009

Acoustics — Noise emitted by machinery and equipment — Engineering method for the determination of emission sound pressure levels in situ at the work station and at other specified positions using sound intensity (ISO 11205:2003)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11546-1:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound insulation performances of enclosures — Part 1: Measurements under laboratory conditions (for declaration purposes) (ISO 11546-1:1995)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11546-2:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound insulation performances of enclosures — Part 2: Measurements in situ (for acceptance and verification purposes) (ISO 11546-2:1995)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11554:2008

Optics and photonics — Lasers and laser-related equipment — Test methods for laser beam power, energy and temporal characteristics (ISO 11554:2006)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11688-1:2009

Acoustics — Recommended practice for the design of low-noise machinery and equipment — Part 1: Planning (ISO/TR 11688-1:1995)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11691:2009

Acoustics — Measurement of insertion loss of ducted silencers without flow — Laboratory survey method (ISO 11691:1995)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11957:2009

Acoustics — Determination of sound insulation performance of cabins — Laboratory and in situ measurements (ISO 11957:1996)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12198-1:2000+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Assessment and reduction of risks arising from radiation emitted by machinery — Part 1: General principles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12198-2:2002+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Assessment and reduction of risks arising from radiation emitted by machinery — Part 2: Radiation emission measurement procedure

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12198-3:2002+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Assessment and reduction of risks arising from radiation emitted by machinery — Part 3: Reduction of radiation by attenuation or screening

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12254:2010

Screens for laser working places — Safety requirements and testing

26.5.2010

EN 12254:1998+A2:2008

Date expired

(30.9.2010)

 

EN 12254:2010/AC:2011

 

 

 

CEN

EN 12786:2013

Safety of machinery — Requirements for the drafting of the vibration clauses of safety standards

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 13478:2001+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Fire prevention and protection

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13490:2001+A1:2008

Mechanical vibration — Industrial trucks — Laboratory evaluation and specification of operator seat vibration

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13732-1:2008

Ergonomics of the thermal environment — Methods for the assessment of human responses to contact with surfaces — Part 1: Hot surfaces (ISO 13732-1:2006)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13732-3:2008

Ergonomics of the thermal environment — Methods for the assessment of human responses to contact with surfaces — Part 3: Cold surfaces (ISO 13732-3:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13753:2008

Mechanical vibration and shock — Hand-arm vibration — Method for measuring the vibration transmissibility of resilient materials when loaded by the hand-arm system (ISO 13753:1998)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13849-1:2008

Safety of machinery — Safety-related parts of control systems — Part 1: General principles for design (ISO 13849-1:2006)

8.9.2009

EN ISO 13849-1:2006

EN 954-1:1996

Date expired

(31.12.2011)

 

EN ISO 13849-1:2008/AC:2009

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13849-2:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety-related parts of control systems — Part 2: Validation (ISO 13849-2:2012)

5.4.2013

EN ISO 13849-2:2008

Date expired

(30.4.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 13850:2008

Safety of machinery — Emergency stop — Principles for design (ISO 13850:2006)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13855:2010

Safety of machinery — Positioning of safeguards with respect to the approach speeds of parts of the human body (ISO 13855:2010)

20.10.2010

EN 999:1998+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.11.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 13856-1:2013

Safety of machinery — Pressure-sensitive protective devices — Part 1: General principles for design and testing of pressure-sensitive mats and pressure-sensitive floors (ISO 13856-1:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 1760-1:1997+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 13856-2:2013

Safety of machinery — Pressure-sensitive protective devices — Part 2: General principles for design and testing of pressure-sensitive edges and pressure-sensitive bars (ISO 13856-2:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 1760-2:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 13856-3:2013

Safety of machinery — Pressure-sensitive protective devices — Part 3: General principles for design and testing of pressure-sensitive bumpers, plates, wires and similar devices (ISO 13856-3:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 1760-3:2004+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.1.2014)

CEN

EN ISO 13857:2008

Safety of machinery — Safety distances to prevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower limbs (ISO 13857:2008)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 14119:2013

Safety of machinery — Interlocking devices associated with guards — Principles for design and selection (ISO 14119:2013)

11.4.2014

EN 1088:1995+A2:2008

30.4.2015

CEN

EN ISO 14122-1:2001

Safety of machinery — Permanent means of access to machinery — Part 1: Choice of fixed means of access between two levels (ISO 14122-1:2001)

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 14122-1:2001/A1:2010

20.10.2010

 

Date expired

(31.10.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 14122-2:2001

Safety of machinery — Permanent means of access to machinery — Part 2: Working platforms and walkways (ISO 14122-2:2001)

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 14122-2:2001/A1:2010

20.10.2010

 

Date expired

(31.10.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 14122-3:2001

Safety of machinery — Permanent means of access to machinery — Part 3: Stairs, stepladders and guard-rails (ISO 14122-3:2001)

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 14122-3:2001/A1:2010

20.10.2010

 

Date expired

(31.10.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 14122-4:2004

Safety of machinery — Permanent means of access to machinery — Part 4: Fixed ladders (ISO 14122-4:2004)

8.4.2011

 

 

 

EN ISO 14122-4:2004/A1:2010

8.4.2011

 

Date expired

(8.4.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 14159:2008

Safety of machinery — Hygiene requirements for the design of machinery (ISO 14159:2002)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 14738:2008

Safety of machinery — Anthropometric requirements for the design of workstations at machinery (ISO 14738:2002, including Cor 1:2003 and Cor 2:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 15536-1:2008

Ergonomics — Computer manikins and body templates — Part 1: General requirements (ISO 15536-1:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15967:2011

Determination of maximum explosion pressure and the maximum rate of pressure rise of gases and vapours

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 20643:2008

Mechanical vibration — Hand-held and hand-guided machinery — Principles for evaluation of vibration emission (ISO 20643:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 20643:2008/A1:2012

15.11.2012

 

Date expired

(31.1.2013)

CEN

EN 30326-1:1994

Mechanical vibration — Laboratory method for evaluating vehicle seat vibration — Part 1: Basic requirements (ISO 10326-1:1992)

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 30326-1:1994/A1:2007

8.9.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

 

EN 30326-1:1994/A2:2011

29.2.2012

 

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

C-type standards

C-type standards provide specifications for a given category of machinery. The different types of machinery belonging to the category covered by a C-type standard have a similar intended use and present similar hazards. C-type standards may refer to A or B-type standards, indicating which of the specifications of the A or B-type standard are applicable to the category of machinery concerned. When, for a given aspect of machinery safety, a C-type standard deviates from the specifications of an A or B-type standard, the specifications of the C-type standard take precedence over the specifications of the A or B-type standard. Application of the specifications of a C-type standard on the basis of the manufacturer ¿s risk assessment confers a presumption of conformity with the essential health and safety requirements of the Machinery Directive covered by the standard. Certain C-type standards are organised as a series of several parts, Part 1 of the standard giving general specifications applicable to a family of machinery and other parts of the standard giving specifications for specific categories of machinery belonging to the family, supplementing or modifying the general specifications of Part 1. For C-type standards organised in this way, the presumption of conformity with the essential health and safety requirements of the Machinery Directive is conferred by application of the general Part 1 of the standard together with the relevant specific part of the standard.

CEN

EN 81-3:2000+A1:2008

Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Part 3: Electric and hydraulic service lifts

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 81-3:2000+A1:2008/AC:2009

 

 

 

CEN

EN 81-31:2010

Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Lifts for the transport of goods only — Part 31: Accessible goods only lifts

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 81-40:2008

Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Special lifts for the transport of persons and goods — Part 40: Stairlifts and inclined lifting platforms intended for persons with impaired mobility

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 81-41:2010

Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Special lifts for the transport of persons and goods — Part 41: Vertical lifting platforms intended for use by persons with impaired mobility

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 81-43:2009

Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts — Special lifts for the transport of persons and goods — Part 43: Lifts for cranes

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 115-1:2008+A1:2010

Safety of escalators and moving walks — Part 1: Construction and installation

26.5.2010

EN 115-1:2008

Date expired

(30.9.2010)

CEN

EN 201:2009

Plastics and rubber machines — Injection moulding machines — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 267:2009+A1:2011

Automatic forced draught burners for liquid fuels

18.11.2011

EN 267:2009

Date expired

(29.2.2012)

CEN

EN 280:2013

Mobile elevating work platforms — Design calculations — Stability criteria — Construction — Safety — Examinations and tests

28.11.2013

EN 280:2001+A2:2009

31.1.2015

CEN

EN 289:2004+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Presses — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 303-5:2012

Heating boilers — Part 5: Heating boilers for solid fuels, manually and automatically stoked, nominal heat output of up to 500 kW — Terminology, requirements, testing and marking

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 378-2:2008+A2:2012

Refrigerating systems and heat pumps — Safety and environmental requirements — Part 2: Design, construction, testing, marking and documentation

24.8.2012

EN 378-2:2008+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2012)

CEN

EN 415-1:2000+A1:2009

Packaging machines safety — Part 1: Terminology and classification of packaging machines and associated equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 415-3:1999+A1:2009

Safety of packaging machines — Part 3: Form, fill and seal machines

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 415-5:2006+A1:2009

Safety of packaging machines — Part 5: Wrapping machines

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 415-6:2013

Safety of packaging machines — Part 6: Pallet wrapping machines

28.11.2013

EN 415-6:2006+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2013)

CEN

EN 415-7:2006+A1:2008

Safety of packaging machines — Part 7: Group and secondary packaging machines

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 415-8:2008

Safety of packaging machines — Part 8: Strapping machines

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 415-9:2009

Safety of packaging machines — Part 9: Noise measurement methods for packaging machines, packaging lines and associated equipment, grade of accuracy 2 and 3

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 415-10:2014

Safety of packaging machines — Part 10: General Requirements

This is the first publication

 

 

CEN

EN 422:2009

Plastics and rubber machines — Blow moulding machines — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 453:2000+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Dough mixers — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 454:2000+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Planetary mixers — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 474-1:2006+A4:2013

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 1: General requirements

28.11.2013

EN 474-1:2006+A3:2013

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 474-1:2006+A4:2013/AC:2014

 

 

 

CEN

EN 474-2:2006+A1:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 2: Requirements for tractor-dozers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-3:2006+A1:2009

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 3: Requirements for loaders

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-4:2006+A2:2012

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 4: Requirements for backhoe loaders

23.3.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 474-5:2006+A3:2013

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 5: Requirements for hydraulic excavators

28.11.2013

EN 474-5:2006+A1:2009+A2:2012

Date expired

(31.1.2014)

CEN

EN 474-6:2006+A1:2009

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 6: Requirements for dumpers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-7:2006+A1:2009

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 7: Requirements for scrapers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-8:2006+A1:2009

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 8: Requirements for graders

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-9:2006+A1:2009

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 9: Requirements for pipelayers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-10:2006+A1:2009

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 10: Requirements for trenchers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-11:2006+A1:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 11: Requirements for earth and landfill compactors

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 474-12:2006+A1:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Safety — Part 12: Requirements for cable excavators

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 500-1:2006+A1:2009

Mobile road construction machinery — Safety — Part 1: Common requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 500-2:2006+A1:2008

Mobile road construction machinery — Safety — Part 2: Specific requirements for road-milling machines

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 500-3:2006+A1:2008

Mobile road construction machinery — Safety — Part 3: Specific requirements for soil-stabilising machines and recycling machines

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 500-4:2011

Mobile road construction machinery — Safety — Part 4: Specific requirements for compaction machines

20.7.2011

EN 500-4:2006+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.8.2011)

CEN

EN 500-6:2006+A1:2008

Mobile road construction machinery — Safety — Part 6: Specific requirements for paver-finishers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 528:2008

Rail dependent storage and retrieval equipment — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 609-1:1999+A2:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Safety of log splitters — Part 1: Wedge splitters

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 609-2:1999+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Safety of log splitters — Part 2: Screw splitters

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 617:2001+A1:2010

Continuous handling equipment and systems — Safety and EMC requirements for the equipment for the storage of bulk materials in silos, bunkers, bins and hoppers

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 618:2002+A1:2010

Continuous handling equipment and systems — Safety and EMC requirements for equipment for mechanical handling of bulk materials except fixed belt conveyors

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 619:2002+A1:2010

Continuous handling equipment and systems — Safety and EMC requirements for equipment for mechanical handling of unit loads

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 620:2002+A1:2010

Continuous handling equipment and systems — Safety and EMC requirements for fixed belt conveyors for bulk materials

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 676:2003+A2:2008

Automatic forced draught burners for gaseous fuels

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 676:2003+A2:2008/AC:2008

 

 

 

CEN

EN 690:2013

Agricultural machinery — Manure spreaders — Safety

11.4.2014

EN 690:1994+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2014)

CEN

EN 692:2005+A1:2009

Machine tools — Mechanical presses — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 693:2001+A2:2011

Machine tools — Safety — Hydraulic presses

18.11.2011

EN 693:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.3.2012)

CEN

EN 703:2004+A1:2009

Agricultural machinery — Silage loading, mixing and/or chopping and distributing machines — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 706:1996+A1:2009

Agricultural machinery — Vine shoot tipping machines — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 707:1999+A1:2009

Agricultural machinery — Slurry tankers — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 709:1997+A4:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Pedestrian controlled tractors with mounted rotary cultivators, motor hoes, motor hoes with drive wheel(s) — Safety

26.5.2010

EN 709:1997+A2:2009

Date expired

(31.12.2010)

 

EN 709:1997+A4:2009/AC:2012

 

 

 

CEN

EN 710:1997+A1:2010

Safety requirements for foundry moulding and coremaking machinery and plant associated equipment

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN 710:1997+A1:2010/AC:2012

 

 

 

CEN

EN 741:2000+A1:2010

Continuous handling equipment and systems — Safety requirements for systems and their components for pneumatic handling of bulk materials

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 746-1:1997+A1:2009

Industrial thermoprocessing equipment — Part 1: Common safety requirements for industrial thermoprocessing equipment

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 746-2:2010

Industrial thermoprocessing equipment — Part 2: Safety requirements for combustion and fuel handling systems

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 746-3:1997+A1:2009

Industrial thermoprocessing equipment — Part 3: Safety requirements for the generation and use of atmosphere gases

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 786:1996+A2:2009

Garden equipment — Electrically powered walk-behind and hand-held lawn trimmers and lawn edge trimmers — Mechanical safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 791:1995+A1:2009

Drill rigs — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 792-13:2000+A1:2008

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 13: Fastener driving tools

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 809:1998+A1:2009

Pumps and pump units for liquids — Common safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 809:1998+A1:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 815:1996+A2:2008

Safety of unshielded tunnel boring machines and rodless shaft boring machines for rock — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-1:1996+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 1: General conditions of acceptance

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-2:1996+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 2: Medium tolerance chain for chain slings — Grade 8

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-3:1999+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 3: Medium tolerance chain for chain slings — Grade 4

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-4:1996+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 4: Chain slings — Grade 8

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-5:1999+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 5: Chain slings — Grade 4

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-6:2000+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 6: Chain slings — Specification for information for use and maintenance to be provided by the manufacturer

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 818-7:2002+A1:2008

Short link chain for lifting purposes — Safety — Part 7: Fine tolerance hoist chain, Grade T (Types T, DAT and DT)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 848-1:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — One side moulding machines with rotating tool — Part 1: Single spindle vertical moulding machines

15.11.2012

EN 848-1:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.3.2013)

CEN

EN 848-2:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — One side moulding machines with rotating tool — Part 2: Single spindle hand fed/integrated fed routing machines

15.11.2012

EN 848-2:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.3.2013)

CEN

EN 848-3:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — One side moulding machines with rotating tool — Part 3: Numerically controlled (NC) boring and routing machines

5.4.2013

EN 848-3:2007+A2:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2013)

CEN

EN 859:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Hand fed surface planing machines

24.8.2012

EN 859:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.12.2012)

CEN

EN 860:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — One side thickness planing machines

24.8.2012

EN 860:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.12.2012)

CEN

EN 861:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Surface planing and thicknessing machines

24.8.2012

EN 861:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.12.2012)

CEN

EN 869:2006+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for pressure metal diecasting units

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 908:1999+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Reel machines for irrigation — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 909:1998+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Centre pivot and moving lateral types irrigation machines — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 930:1997+A2:2009

Footwear, leather and imitation leather goods manufacturing machines — Roughing, scouring, polishing and trimming machines — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 931:1997+A2:2009

Footwear manufacturing machines — Lasting machines — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 940:2009+A1:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Combined woodworking machines

5.6.2012

EN 940:2009

Date expired

(31.8.2012)

CEN

EN 972:1998+A1:2010

Tannery machines — Reciprocating roller machines — Safety requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

 

EN 972:1998+A1:2010/AC:2011

 

 

 

CEN

EN 996:1995+A3:2009

Piling equipment — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1010-1:2004+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of printing and paper converting machines — Part 1: Common requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1010-2:2006+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of printing and paper converting machines — Part 2: Printing and varnishing machines including pre-press machinery

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1010-3:2002+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of printing and paper converting machines — Part 3: Cutting machines

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1010-4:2004+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of printing and paper converting machines — Part 4: Bookbinding, paper converting and finishing machines

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1012-1:2010

Compressors and vacuum pumps — Safety requirements — Part 1: Air compressors

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1012-2:1996+A1:2009

Compressors and vacuum pumps — Safety requirements — Part 2: Vacuum pumps

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1012-3:2013

Compressors and vacuum pumps — Safety requirements — Part 3: Process compressors

11.4.2014

 

 

CEN

EN 1028-1:2002+A1:2008

Fire-fighting pumps — Fire-fighting centrifugal pumps with primer — Part 1: Classification — General and safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1028-2:2002+A1:2008

Fire-fighting pumps — Fire-fighting centrifugal pumps with primer — Part 2: Verification of general and safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-1:2000+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 1: Common requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-2:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 2: Barking drums

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-3:2011

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 3: Rereelers and winders

29.2.2012

EN 1034-3:1999+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN 1034-4:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 4: Pulpers and their loading facilities

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-5:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 5: Sheeters

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-6:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 6: Calender

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-7:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 7: Chests

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-8:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 8: Refining plants

5.6.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-13:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 13: Machines for de-wiring bales and units

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-14:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 14: Reel splitter

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-16:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 16: Paper and board making machines

5.6.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-17:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 17: Tissue making machines

15.11.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-21:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 21: Coating machines

15.11.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-22:2005+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 22: Wood Grinders

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-26:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 26: Roll packaging machines

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1034-27:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for the design and construction of paper making and finishing machines — Part 27: Roll handling systems

15.11.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1114-1:2011

Plastics and rubber machines — Extruders and extrusion lines — Part 1: Safety requirements for extruders

29.2.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1114-3:2001+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Extruders and extrusion lines — Part 3: Safety requirements for haul-offs

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1127-2:2002+A1:2008

Explosive atmospheres — Explosion prevention and protection — Part 2: Basic concepts and methodology for mining

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1175-1:1998+A1:2010

Safety of industrial trucks — Electrical requirements — Part 1: General requirements for battery powered trucks

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1175-2:1998+A1:2010

Safety of industrial trucks — Electrical requirements — Part 2: General requirements of internal combustion engine powered trucks

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1175-3:1998+A1:2010

Safety of industrial trucks — Electrical requirements — Part 3: Specific requirements for the electric power transmission systems of internal combustion engine powered trucks

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1218-1:1999+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Tenoning machines — Part 1: Single end tenoning machines with sliding table

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1218-2:2004+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Tenoning machines — Part 2: Double end tenoning and/or profiling machines fed by chain or chains

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1218-3:2001+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Tenoning machines — Part 3: Hand fed tenoning machines with sliding table for cutting structural timbers

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1218-4:2004+A2:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Tenoning machines — Part 4: Edge banding machines fed by chain(s)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1218-5:2004+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Tenoning machines — Part 5: One side profiling machines with fixed table and feed rollers or feed chain

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1247:2004+A1:2010

Foundry machinery — Safety requirements for ladles, pouring equipment, centrifugal casting machines, continuous and semi continuous casting machines

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1248:2001+A1:2009

Foundry machinery — Safety requirements for abrasive blasting equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1265:1999+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Noise test code for foundry machines and equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1374:2000+A1:2010

Agricultural machinery — Silos stationary unloaders for round silos — Safety

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1398:2009

Dock levellers — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1417:1996+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Two roll mills — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 1417:1996+A1:2008/AC:2009

 

 

 

CEN

EN 1459:1998+A3:2012

Safety of industrial trucks — Self-propelled variable reach trucks

23.3.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1492-1:2000+A1:2008

Textile slings — Safety — Part 1: Flat woven webbing slings made of man-made fibres for general purpose use

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1492-2:2000+A1:2008

Textile slings — Safety — Part 2: Roundslings made of man-made fibres for general purpose use

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1492-4:2004+A1:2008

Textile slings — Safety — Part 4: Lifting slings for general service made from natural and man-made fibre ropes

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1493:2010

Vehicle lifts

8.4.2011

EN 1493:1998+A1:2008

Date expired

(4.8.2011)

CEN

EN 1494:2000+A1:2008

Mobile or movable jacks and associated lifting equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1495:1997+A2:2009

Lifting platforms — Mast climbing work platforms

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 1495:1997+A2:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

Warning: This publication does not concern paragraph 5.3.2.4, the last subparagraph of 7.1.2.12, table 8 and figure 9 of standard EN 1495:1997, in respect of which it grants no presumption of conformity to the provisions of Directive 2006/42/EC.

CEN

EN 1501-1:2011

Refuse collection vehicles — General requirements and safety requirements — Part 1: Rear loaded refuse collection vehicles

18.11.2011

EN 1501-1:1998+A2:2009

Date expired

(29.2.2012)

CEN

EN 1501-2:2005+A1:2009

Refuse collection vehicles and associated lifting devices — General requirements and safety requirements — Part 2: Side loaded refuse collection vehicles

29.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1501-3:2008

Refuse collection vehicles and their associated lifting devices — General requirements and safety requirements — Part 3: Front loaded refuse collection vehicles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1501-4:2007

Refuse collection vehicles and their associated lifting devices — General requirements and safety requirements — Part 4: Noise test code for refuse collection vehicles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1501-5:2011

Refuse collection vehicles — General requirements and safety requirements — Part 5: Lifting devices for refuse collection vehicles

18.11.2011

EN 1501-1:1998+A2:2009

Date expired

(29.2.2012)

CEN

EN 1526:1997+A1:2008

Safety of industrial trucks — Additional requirements for automated functions on trucks

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1539:2009

Dryers and ovens, in which flammable substances are released — Safety requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1547:2001+A1:2009

Industrial thermoprocessing equipment — Noise test code for industrial thermoprocessing equipment including its ancillary handling equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1550:1997+A1:2008

Machine-tools safety — Safety requirements for the design and construction of work holding chucks

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1554:2012

Conveyor belts — Drum friction testing

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 1570-1:2011

Safety requirements for lifting tables — Part 1: Lifting tables serving up to two fixed landings

29.2.2012

EN 1570:1998+A2:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2012)

CEN

EN 1612-1:1997+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Reaction moulding machines — Part 1: Safety requirements for metering and mixing units

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1672-2:2005+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Basic concepts — Part 2: Hygiene requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1673:2000+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Rotary rack ovens — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1674:2000+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Dough and pastry brakes — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1677-1:2000+A1:2008

Components for slings — Safety — Part 1: Forged steel components, Grade 8

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1677-2:2000+A1:2008

Components for slings — Safety — Part 2: Forged steel lifting hooks with latch, Grade 8

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1677-3:2001+A1:2008

Components for slings — Safety — Part 3: Forged steel self-locking hooks — Grade 8

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1677-4:2000+A1:2008

Components for slings — Safety — Part 4: Links, Grade 8

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1677-5:2001+A1:2008

Components for slings — Safety — Part 5: Forged steel lifting hooks with latch — Grade 4

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1677-6:2001+A1:2008

Components for slings — Safety — Part 6: Links — Grade 4

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1678:1998+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Vegetable cutting machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1679-1:1998+A1:2011

Reciprocating internal combustion engines — Safety — Part 1: Compression ignition engines

20.7.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1710:2005+A1:2008

Equipment and components intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres in underground mines

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 1710:2005+A1:2008/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 1755:2000+A2:2013

Safety of industrial trucks — Operation in potentially explosive atmospheres — Use in flammable gas, vapour, mist and dust

28.11.2013

EN 1755:2000+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1756-1:2001+A1:2008

Tail lifts — Platform lifts for mounting on wheeled vehicles — Safety requirements — Part 1: Tail lifts for goods

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1756-2:2004+A1:2009

Tail lifts — Platform lifts for mounting on wheeled vehicles — Safety requirements — Part 2: Tail lifts for passengers

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1777:2010

Hydraulic platforms (HPs) for fire fighting and rescue services — Safety requirements and testing

26.5.2010

EN 1777:2004+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.9.2010)

CEN

EN 1804-1:2001+A1:2010

Machines for underground mines — Safety requirements for hydraulic powered roof supports — Part 1: Support units and general requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1804-2:2001+A1:2010

Machines for underground mines — Safety requirements for hydraulic powered roof supports — Part 2: Power set legs and rams

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1804-3:2006+A1:2010

Machines for underground mines — Safety requirements for hydraulic powered roof supports — Part 3: Hydraulic control systems

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1807-1:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Band sawing machines — Part 1: Table band saws and band re-saws

28.11.2013

EN 1807:1999+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1807-2:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Band sawing machines — Part 2: Log sawing machines

28.11.2013

EN 1807:1999+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1808:1999+A1:2010

Safety requirements on Suspended Access Equipment — Design calculations, stability criteria, construction — Tests

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1829-1:2010

High pressure water jet machines — Safety requirements — Part 1: Machines

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 1829-2:2008

High-pressure water jet machines — Safety requirements — Part 2: Hoses, hose lines and connectors

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 1829-2:2008/AC:2011

 

 

 

CEN

EN 1845:2007

Footwear manufacturing machines — Footwear moulding machines — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1846-2:2009+A1:2013

Firefighting and rescue service vehicles — Part 2: Common requirements — Safety and performance

28.11.2013

EN 1846-2:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1846-3:2013

Firefighting and rescue service vehicles — Part 3: Permanently installed equipment — Safety and performance

28.11.2013

EN 1846-3:2002+A1:2008

Date expired

(31.1.2014)

CEN

EN 1853:1999+A1:2009

Agricultural machinery — Trailers with tipping body — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1870-3:2001+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 3: Down cutting cross-cut saws and dual purpose down cutting cross-cut saws/circular saw benches

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1870-4:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 4: Multiblade rip sawing machines with manual loading and/or unloading

5.6.2012

EN 1870-4:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.9.2012)

CEN

EN 1870-5:2002+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 5: Circular sawbenches/up-cutting cross-cut sawing machines

15.11.2012

EN 1870-5:2002+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.3.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-6:2002+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 6: Circular sawing machines for firewood and dual purpose circular sawing machines for firewood/circular saw benches, with manual loading and/or unloading

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1870-7:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 7: Single blade log sawing machines with integrated feed table and manual loading and/or unloading

5.4.2013

EN 1870-7:2002+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-8:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 8: Single blade edging circular rip sawing machines with power driven saw unit and manual loading and/or unloading

5.4.2013

EN 1870-8:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.5.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-9:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 9: Double blade circular sawing machines for cross-cutting with integrated feed and with manual loading and/or unloading

15.11.2012

EN 1870-9:2000+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.3.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-10:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 10: Single blade automatic and semi-automatic up-cutting cross-cut sawing machines

28.11.2013

EN 1870-10:2003+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-11:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 11: Semi automatic horizontal cross-cut sawing machines with one saw unit (radial arm saws)

11.4.2014

EN 1870-11:2003+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2014)

CEN

EN 1870-12:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 12: Pendulum cross-cut sawing machines

11.4.2014

EN 1870-12:2003+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2014)

CEN

EN 1870-13:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 13: Horizontal beam panel sawing machines

5.6.2012

EN 1870-13:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.9.2012)

CEN

EN 1870-14:2007+A2:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 14: Vertical panel sawing machines

5.6.2012

EN 1870-14:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.9.2012)

CEN

EN 1870-15:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 15: Multi-blade cross-cut sawing machines with integrated feed of the workpiece and manual loading and/or unloading

5.4.2013

EN 1870-15:2004+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-16:2012

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 16: Double mitre sawing machines for V cutting

5.4.2013

EN 1870-16:2005+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-17:2007+A2:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 17: Manual horizontal cutting cross-cut sawing machines with one saw unit (manual radial arm saws)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1870-18:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 18: Dimension saws

28.11.2013

EN 1870-1:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1870-19:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Circular sawing machines — Part 19: Circular saw benches (with and without sliding table) and building site saws

11.4.2014

EN 1870-1:2007+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.5.2014)

CEN

EN 1889-1:2011

Machines for underground mines — Mobile machines working underground — Safety — Part 1: Rubber tyred vehicles

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 1889-2:2003+A1:2009

Machines for underground mines — Mobile machines working underground — Safety — Part 2: Rail locomotives

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1915-1:2013

Aircraft ground support equipment — General requirements — Part 1: Basic safety requirements

28.11.2013

EN 1915-1:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 1915-2:2001+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — General requirements — Part 2: Stability and strength requirements, calculations and test methods

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1915-3:2004+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — General requirements — Part 3: Vibration measurement methods and reduction

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1915-4:2004+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — General requirements — Part 4: Noise measurement methods and reduction

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 1953:2013

Atomising and spraying equipment for coating materials — Safety requirements

28.11.2013

EN 1953:1998+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.3.2014)

CEN

EN 1974:1998+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Slicing machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 2151:2008

Acoustics — Noise test code for compressors and vacuum pumps — Engineering method (Grade 2) (ISO 2151:2004)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 2860:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Minimum access dimensions (ISO 2860:1992)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 2867:2011

Earth-moving machinery — Access systems (ISO 2867:2011)

18.11.2011

EN ISO 2867:2008

31.7.2014

CEN

EN ISO 3164:2013

Earth-moving machinery — Laboratory evaluations of protective structures — Specifications for deflection-limiting volume (ISO 3164:2013)

28.11.2013

EN ISO 3164:2008

Date expired

(30.11.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 3266:2010

Forged steel eyebolts grade 4 for general lifting purposes (ISO 3266:2010)

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3411:2007

Earth-moving machinery — Physical dimensions of operators and minimum operator space envelope (ISO 3411:2007)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3449:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Falling-object protective structures — Laboratory tests and performance requirements (ISO 3449:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3450:2011

Earth-moving machinery — Wheeled or high-speed rubber-tracked machines — Performance requirements and test procedures for brake systems (ISO 3450:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 3450:2008

Date expired

(31.5.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 3457:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Guards — Definitions and requirements (ISO 3457:2003)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3471:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Roll-over protective structures — Laboratory tests and performance requirements (ISO 3471:2008)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 3691-5:2014

Industrial trucks — Safety requirements and verification — Part 5: Pedestrian-propelled trucks (ISO 3691-5:2014)

This is the first publication

EN ISO 3691-5:2009

31.8.2014

CEN

EN ISO 3691-6:2013

Industrial trucks — Safety requirements and verification — Part 6: Burden and personnel carriers (ISO 3691-6:2013)

This is the first publication

 

 

 

EN ISO 3691-6:2013/AC:2014

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 4254-1:2013

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 1: General requirements (ISO 4254-1:2013)

28.11.2013

EN ISO 4254-1:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 4254-5:2009

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 5: Power-driven soil-working machines (ISO 4254-5:2008)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 4254-5:2009/AC:2011

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 4254-6:2009

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 6: Sprayers and liquid fertilizer distributors (ISO 4254-6:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 4254-6:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 4254-7:2009

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 7: Combine harvesters, forage harvesters and cotton harvesters (ISO 4254-7:2008)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 4254-7:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 4254-10:2009

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 10: Rotary tedders and rakes (ISO 4254-10:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 4254-10:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 4254-11:2010

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 11: Pick-up balers (ISO 4254-11:2010)

8.4.2011

EN 704:1999+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.6.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 4254-12:2012

Agricultural machinery — Safety — Part 12: Rotary disc and drum mowers and flail mowers (ISO 4254-12:2012)

24.8.2012

EN 745:1999+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.12.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 5395-1:2013

Garden equipment — Safety requirements for combustion-engine-powered lawnmowers — Part 1: Terminology and common tests (ISO 5395-1:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 836:1997+A4:2011

30.9.2014

CEN

EN ISO 5395-2:2013

Garden equipment — Safety requirements for combustion-engine-powered lawnmowers — Part 2: Pedestrian-controlled lawnmowers (ISO 5395-2:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 836:1997+A4:2011

30.9.2014

CEN

EN ISO 5395-3:2013

Garden equipment — Safety requirements for combustion-engine-powered lawnmowers — Part 3: Ride-on lawnmowers with seated operator (ISO 5395-3:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 836:1997+A4:2011

30.9.2014

CEN

EN ISO 5674:2009

Tractors and machinery for agriculture and forestry — Guards for power take-off (PTO) drive-shafts — Strength and wear tests and acceptance criteria (ISO 5674:2004, corrected version 2005-07-01)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 6682:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Zones of comfort and reach for controls (ISO 6682:1986, including Amd 1:1989)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 6683:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Seat belts and seat belt anchorages — Performance requirements and tests (ISO 6683:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 7096:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Laboratory evaluation of operator seat vibration (ISO 7096:2000)

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 7096:2008/AC:2009

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 8230-1:2008

Safety requirements for dry-cleaning machines — Part 1: Common safety requirements (ISO 8230-1:2008)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 8230-2:2008

Safety requirements for dry-cleaning machines — Part 2: Machines using perchloroethylene (ISO 8230-2:2008)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 8230-3:2008

Safety requirements for dry-cleaning machines — Part 3: Machines using combustible solvents (ISO 8230-3:2008)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 9902-1:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 1: Common requirements (ISO 9902-1:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-1:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 9902-2:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 2: Spinning preparatory and spinning machinery (ISO 9902-2:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-2:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 9902-3:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 3: Nonwoven machinery (ISO 9902-3:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-3:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 9902-4:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 4: Yarn processing, cordage and rope manufacturing machinery (ISO 9902-4:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-4:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 9902-5:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 5: Weaving and knitting preparatory machinery (ISO 9902-5:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-5:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 9902-6:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 6: Fabric manufacturing machinery (ISO 9902-6:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-6:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 9902-7:2001

Textile machinery — Noise test code — Part 7: Dyeing and finishing machinery (ISO 9902-7:2001)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 9902-7:2001/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 10218-1:2011

Robots and robotic devices — Safety requirements for industrial robots — Part 1: Robots (ISO 10218-1:2011)

18.11.2011

EN ISO 10218-1:2008

Date expired

(1.1.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 10218-2:2011

Robots and robotic devices — Safety requirements for industrial robots — Part 2: Robot systems and integration (ISO 10218-2:2011)

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10472-1:2008

Safety requirements for industrial laundry machinery — Part 1: Common requirements (ISO 10472-1:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10472-2:2008

Safety requirements for industrial laundry machinery — Part 2: Washing machines and washer-extractors (ISO 10472-2:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10472-3:2008

Safety requirements for industrial laundry machinery — Part 3: Washing tunnel lines including component machines (ISO 10472-3:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10472-4:2008

Safety requirements for industrial laundry machinery — Part 4: Air dryers (ISO 10472-4:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10472-5:2008

Safety requirements for industrial laundry machinery — Part 5: Flatwork ironers, feeders and folders (ISO 10472-5:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10472-6:2008

Safety requirements for industrial laundry machinery — Part 6: Ironing and fusing presses (ISO 10472-6:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 10517:2009

Powered hand-held hedge trimmers — Safety (ISO 10517:2009)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 10517:2009/A1:2013

28.11.2013

 

30.9.2014

CEN

EN ISO 10821:2005

Industrial sewing machines — Safety requirements for sewing machines, units and systems (ISO 10821:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 10821:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(28.12.2009)

CEN

EN ISO 11102-1:2009

Reciprocating internal combustion engines — Handle starting equipment — Part 1: Safety requirements and tests (ISO 11102-1:1997)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11102-2:2009

Reciprocating internal combustion engines — Handle starting equipment — Part 2: Method of testing the angle of disengagement (ISO 11102-2:1997)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11111-1:2009

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 1: Common requirements (ISO 11111-1:2009)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11111-2:2005

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 2: Spinning preparatory and spinning machines (ISO 11111-2:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 11111-2:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11111-3:2005

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 3: Nonwoven machinery (ISO 11111-3:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 11111-3:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11111-4:2005

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 4: Yarn processing, cordage and rope manufacturing machinery (ISO 11111-4:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 11111-4:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11111-5:2005

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 5: Preparatory machinery to weaving and knitting (ISO 11111-5:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 11111-5:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11111-6:2005

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 6: Fabric manufacturing machinery (ISO 11111-6:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 11111-6:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11111-7:2005

Textile machinery — Safety requirements — Part 7: Dyeing and finishing machinery (ISO 11111-7:2005)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 11111-7:2005/A1:2009

18.12.2009

 

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-1:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 1: Assembly power tools for non-threaded mechanical fasteners (ISO 11148-1:2011)

24.8.2012

EN 792-1:2000+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-2:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 2: Cutting-off and crimping power tools (ISO/FDIS 11148-2:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 792-2:2000+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-3:2012

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 3: Drills and tappers (ISO 11148-3:2012)

5.4.2013

EN ISO 11148-3:2010

Date expired

(30.6.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-4:2012

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 4: Non-rotary percussive power tools (ISO 11148-4:2012)

5.4.2013

EN ISO 11148-4:2010

Date expired

(30.6.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-5:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 5: Rotary percussive drills (ISO 11148-5:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 792-5:2000+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-6:2012

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 6: Assembly power tools for threaded fasteners (ISO 11148-6:2012)

5.4.2013

EN ISO 11148-6:2010

Date expired

(30.6.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-7:2012

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 7: Grinders (ISO 11148-7:2012)

15.11.2012

EN 792-7:2001+A1:2008

Date expired

(28.2.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-8:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 8: Sanders and polishers (ISO 11148-8:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 792-8:2001+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-9:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 9: Die grinders (ISO 11148-9:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 792-9:2001+A1:2008

Date expired

(1.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-10:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 10: Compression power tools (ISO 11148-10:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 792-10:2000+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-11:2011

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 11: Nibblers and shears (ISO 11148-11:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 792-11:2000+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11148-12:2012

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Safety requirements — Part 12: Circular, oscillating and reciprocating saws (ISO 11148-12:2012)

5.4.2013

EN 792-12:2000+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 11252:2013

Lasers and laser-related equipment — Laser device — Minimum requirements for documentation (ISO 11252:2013)

28.11.2013

EN ISO 11252:2008

Date expired

(28.2.2014)

CEN

EN ISO 11553-1:2008

Safety of machinery — Laser processing machines — Part 1: General safety requirements (ISO 11553-1:2005)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11553-2:2008

Safety of machinery — Laser processing machines — Part 2: Safety requirements for hand-held laser processing devices (ISO 11553-2:2007)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11553-3:2013

Safety of machinery — Laser processing machines — Part 3: Noise reduction and noise measurement methods for laser processing machines and hand-held processing devices and associated auxiliary equipment (accuracy grade 2) (ISO 11553-3:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11680-1:2011

Machinery for forestry — Safety requirements and testing for pole-mounted powered pruners — Part 1: Machines fitted with an integral combustion engine (ISO 11680-1:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 11680-1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11680-2:2011

Machinery for forestry — Safety requirements and testing for pole-mounted powered pruners — Part 2: Machines for use with back-pack power source (ISO 11680-2:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 11680-2:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11681-1:2011

Machinery for forestry — Portable chain-saw safety requirements and testing — Part 1: Chain-saws for forest service (ISO 11681-1:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 11681-1:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11681-2:2011

Machinery for forestry — Portable chain-saw safety requirements and testing — Part 2: Chain-saws for tree service (ISO 11681-2:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 11681-2:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11806-1:2011

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Safety requirements and testing for portable, hand-held, powered brush-cutters and grass-trimmers — Part 1: Machines fitted with an integral combustion engine (ISO 11806-1:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 11806:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 11806-2:2011

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Safety requirements and testing for portable, hand-held, powered brush-cutters and grass-trimmers — Part 2: Machines for use with back-pack power unit (ISO 11806-2:2011)

29.2.2012

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 11850:2011

Machinery for forestry — General safety requirements (ISO 11850:2011)

29.2.2012

EN 14861:2004+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.5.2012)

CEN

EN 12001:2012

Conveying, spraying and placing machines for concrete and mortar — Safety requirements

15.11.2012

EN 12001:2003+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.2.2013)

CEN

EN 12012-1:2007+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Size reduction machines — Part 1: Safety requirements for blade granulators

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12012-3:2001+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Size reduction machines — Part 3: Safety requirements for shredders

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12012-4:2006+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Size reduction machines — Part 4: Safety requirements for agglomerators

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12013:2000+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Internal mixers — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12016:2013

Electromagnetic compatibility — Product family standard for lifts, escalators and moving walks — Immunity

28.11.2013

EN 12016:2004+A1:2008

Date expired

(28.2.2014)

CEN

EN 12041:2000+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Moulders — Safety and hygiene requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12042:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Automatic dividers — Safety and hygiene requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12043:2000+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Intermediate provers — Safety and hygiene requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12044:2005+A1:2009

Footwear, leather and imitation leather goods manufacturing machines — Cutting and punching machines — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12053:2001+A1:2008

Safety of industrial trucks — Test methods for measuring noise emissions

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12077-2:1998+A1:2008

Cranes safety — Requirements for health and safety — Part 2: Limiting and indicating devices

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12110:2002+A1:2008

Tunnelling machines — Air locks — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12111:2002+A1:2009

Tunnelling machines — Road headers, continuous miners and impact rippers — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12158-1:2000+A1:2010

Builders' hoists for goods — Part 1: Hoists with accessible platforms

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12158-2:2000+A1:2010

Builders' hoists for goods — Part 2: Inclined hoists with non-accessible load carrying devices

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12159:2012

Builders hoists for persons and materials with vertically guided cages

5.4.2013

EN 12159:2000+A1:2009

Date expired

(31.5.2013)

CEN

EN 12162:2001+A1:2009

Liquid pumps — Safety requirements — Procedure for hydrostatic testing

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12203:2003+A1:2009

Footwear, leather and imitation leather goods manufacturing machines — Shoe and leather presses — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12267:2003+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Circular saw machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12268:2003+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Band saw machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12301:2000+A1:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Calenders — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-1:2013

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 1: Passenger stairs

28.11.2013

EN 12312-1:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 12312-2:2002+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 2: Catering vehicles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-3:2003+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 3: Conveyor belt vehicles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-4:2014

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 4: Passenger boarding bridges

This is the first publication

EN 12312-4:2003+A1:2009

30.9.2014

CEN

EN 12312-5:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 5: Aircraft fuelling equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-6:2004+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 6: Deicers and deicing/antiicing equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-7:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 7: Air-craft movement equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-8:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 8: Maintenance stairs and platforms

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-9:2013

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 9: Container/Pallet loaders

28.11.2013

EN 12312-9:2005+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 12312-10:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 10: Container/Pallet transfer transporters

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-12:2002+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 12: Potable water service equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-13:2002+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 13: Lavatory service equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-14:2006+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 14: Disabled/incapacitated passenger boarding vehicles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-15:2006+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 15: Baggage and equipment tractors

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-16:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 16: Air start equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-17:2004+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 17: Air conditioning equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-18:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 18: Nitrogen or Oxygen units

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-19:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 19: Aircraft jacks, axle jacks and hydraulic tail stanchions

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12312-20:2005+A1:2009

Aircraft ground support equipment — Specific requirements — Part 20: Electrical ground power units

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12321:2003+A1:2009

Underground mining machinery — Specification for the safety requirements of armoured face conveyors

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12331:2003+A2:2010

Food processing machinery — Mincing machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12336:2005+A1:2008

Tunnelling machines — Shield machines, thrust boring machines, auger boring machines, lining erection equipment — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12348:2000+A1:2009

Core drilling machines on stand — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12355:2003+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Derinding-, skinning- and membrane removal machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12385-1:2002+A1:2008

Steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 1: General requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12385-2:2002+A1:2008

Steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 2: Definitions, designation and classification

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12385-3:2004+A1:2008

Steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 3: Information for use and maintenance

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12385-4:2002+A1:2008

Steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 4: Stranded ropes for general lifting applications

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12385-10:2003+A1:2008

Steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 10: Spiral ropes for general structural applications

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12387:2005+A1:2009

Footwear, leather and imitation leather goods manufacturing machines — Modular shoe repair equipment — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12409:2008+A1:2011

Plastics and rubber machines — Thermoforming machines — Safety requirements

29.2.2012

EN 12409:2008

Date expired

(30.4.2012)

CEN

EN 12417:2001+A2:2009

Machine tools — Safety — Machining centres

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 12417:2001+A2:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 12418:2000+A1:2009

Masonry and stone cutting-off machines for job site — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12463:2004+A1:2011

Food processing machinery — Filling machines and auxiliary machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.7.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12505:2000+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Centrifugal machines for processing edible oils and fats — Safety and hygiene requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12525:2000+A2:2010

Agricultural machinery — Front loaders — Safety

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12545:2000+A1:2009

Footwear, leather and imitation leather goods manufacturing machines — Noise test code — Common requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12547:1999+A1:2009

Centrifuges — Common safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12549:1999+A1:2008

Acoustics — Noise test code for fastener driving tools — Engineering method

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12581:2005+A1:2010

Coating plants — Machinery for dip coating and electrodeposition of organic liquid coating material — Safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12601:2010

Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven generating sets — Safety

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12621:2006+A1:2010

Machinery for the supply and circulation of coating materials under pressure — Safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12622:2009+A1:2013

Safety of machine tools — Hydraulic press brakes

11.4.2014

EN 12622:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2014)

CEN

EN 12629-1:2000+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 1: Common requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-2:2002+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 2: Block making machines

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-3:2002+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 3: Slide and turntable machines

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-4:2001+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 4:Concrete roof tile making machines

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-5-1:2003+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 5-1: Pipe making machines manufacturing in the vertical axis

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-5-2:2003+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 5-2: Pipe making machines manufacturing in the horizontal axis

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-5-3:2003+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 5-3: Pipe prestressing machines

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-5-4:2003+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 5-4: Concrete pipe coating machines

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-6:2004+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 6: Stationary and mobile equipment for the manufacture of precast reinforced products

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-7:2004+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 7: Stationary and mobile equipment for long line manufacture of prestressed products

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12629-8:2002+A1:2010

Machines for the manufacture of constructional products from concrete and calcium-silicate — Safety — Part 8: Machines and equipment for the manufacture of constructional products from calcium-silicate (and concrete)

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 12635:2002+A1:2008

Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates — Installation and use

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12643:2014

Earth-moving machinery — Rubber-tyred machines — Steering requirements (ISO 5010:1992 modified)

This is the first publication

EN 12643:1997+A1:2008

31.8.2014

CEN

EN 12644-1:2001+A1:2008

Cranes — Information for use and testing — Part 1: Instructions

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12644-2:2000+A1:2008

Cranes — Information for use and testing — Part 2: Marking

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12649:2008+A1:2011

Concrete compactors and smoothing machines — Safety

18.11.2011

EN 12649:2008

Date expired

(31.1.2012)

CEN

EN 12653:1999+A2:2009

Footwear, leather and imitation leather manufacturing machines — Nailing machines — Safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12693:2008

Refrigerating systems and heat pumps — Safety and environmental requirements — Positive displacement refrigerant compressors

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12717:2001+A1:2009

Safety of machine tools — Drilling machines

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12733:2001+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Pedestrian controlled motor mowers — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12750:2013

Safety of woodworking machines — Four sided moulding machines

28.11.2013

EN 12750:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 12753:2005+A1:2010

Thermal cleaning systems for exhaust gas from surface treatment equipment — Safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12757-1:2005+A1:2010

Mixing machinery for coating materials — Safety requirements — Part 1: Mixing machinery for use in vehicle refinishing

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12779:2004+A1:2009

Safety of woodworking machines — Chip and dust extraction systems with fixed installation — Safety related performances and safety requirements

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12851:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Catering attachments for machines having an auxiliary drive hub — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12852:2001+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Food processors and blenders — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12853:2001+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Hand-held blenders and whisks — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN 12853:2001+A1:2010/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 12854:2003+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Beam mixers — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12855:2003+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Rotating bowl cutters — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12881-1:2005+A1:2008

Conveyor belts — Fire simulation flammability testing — Part 1: Propane burner tests

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12881-2:2005+A1:2008

Conveyor belts — Fire simulation flammability testing — Part 2: Large scale fire test

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12882:2008

Conveyor belts for general purpose use — Electrical and flammability safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12921-1:2005+A1:2010

Machines for surface cleaning and pre-treatment of industrial items using liquids or vapours — Part 1: Common safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12921-2:2005+A1:2008

Machines for surface cleaning and pre-treatment of industrial items using liquids or vapours — Part 2: Safety of machines using water based cleaning liquids

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12921-3:2005+A1:2008

Machines for surface cleaning and pre-treatment of industrial items using liquids or vapours — Part 3: Safety of machines using flammable cleaning liquids

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12921-4:2005+A1:2008

Machines for surface cleaning and pretreatment of industrial items using liquids and vapours — Part 4: Safety of machines using halogenated solvents

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12965:2003+A2:2009

Tractors and machinery for agriculture and forestry — Power take-off (PTO) drive shafts and their guards — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12978:2003+A1:2009

Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates — Safety devices for power operated doors and gates — Requirements and test methods

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12981:2005+A1:2009

Coating plants — Spray booths for application of organic powder coating material — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 12984:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Portable and/or hand-guided machines and appliances with mechanically driven cutting tools — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 12999:2011+A1:2012

Cranes — Loader cranes

24.8.2012

EN 12999:2011

Date expired

(31.12.2012)

CEN

EN 13000:2010

Cranes — Mobile cranes

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 13000:2010/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13001-1:2004+A1:2009

Cranes — General design — Part 1: General principles and requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 13001-1:2004+A1:2009/AC:2009

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13001-2:2011

Crane safety — General design — Part 2: Load actions

18.11.2011

EN 13001-2:2004+A3:2009

Date expired

(18.11.2011)

 

EN 13001-2:2011/AC:2012

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13001-3-1:2012+A1:2013

Cranes — General Design — Part 3-1: Limit States and proof competence of steel structure

28.11.2013

EN 13001-3-1:2012

Date expired

(31.1.2014)

CEN

EN 13015:2001+A1:2008

Maintenance for lifts and escalators — Rules for maintenance instructions

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13019:2001+A1:2008

Machines for road surface cleaning — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13020:2004+A1:2010

Road surface treatment machines — Safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13021:2003+A1:2008

Winter service machines — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13023:2003+A1:2010

Noise measurement methods for printing, paper converting, paper making machines and auxiliary equipment — Accuracy grades 2 and 3

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-1:2008

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 1: Storage, handling and transportation equipment inside the factory

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-2:2008

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 2: Storage, handling and transportation equipment outside the factory

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-3:2003+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 3: Cutting machines

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 13035-3:2003+A1:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-4:2003+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 4: Tilting tables

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-5:2006+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 5: Machines and installations for stacking and de-stacking

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-6:2006+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 6: Machines for break-out

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-7:2006+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 7: Cutting machines for laminated glass

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-9:2006+A1:2010

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 9: Washing installations

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13035-11:2006+A1:2010

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of flat glass — Safety requirements — Part 11: Drilling machines

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13042-1:2007+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of hollow glass — Safety requirements — Part 1: Gob feeder

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13042-2:2004+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of hollow glass — Safety requirements — Part 2: Handling machines for feeding

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13042-3:2007+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of hollow glass — Safety requirements — Part 3: IS machines

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13042-5:2003+A1:2009

Machines and plants for the manufacture, treatment and processing of hollow glass — Safety requirements — Part 5: Presses

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13059:2002+A1:2008

Safety of industrial trucks — Test methods for measuring vibration

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13102:2005+A1:2008

Ceramic machines — Safety — Loading and unloading of fine clay tiles

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13112:2002+A1:2009

Tannery machines — Splitting and bandknife shearing machines — Safety requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13113:2002+A1:2010

Tannery machines — Roller coating machines — Safety requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 13114:2002+A1:2009

Tannery machines — Rotating process vessels — Safety requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13118:2000+A1:2009

Agricultural machinery — Potato harvesting equipment — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13120:2009+A1:2014

Internal blinds — Performance requirements including safety

This is the first publication

EN 13120:2009

31.8.2014

CEN

EN 13128:2001+A2:2009

Safety of machine tools — Milling machines (including boring machines)

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 13128:2001+A2:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13135:2013

Cranes — Safety — Design — Requirements for equipment

28.11.2013

EN 13135-2:2004+A1:2010

EN 13135-1:2003+A1:2010

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

CEN

EN 13140:2000+A1:2009

Agricultural machinery — Sugar beet and fodder beet harvesting equipment — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13155:2003+A2:2009

Cranes — Safety — Non-fixed load lifting attachments

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13157:2004+A1:2009

Cranes — Safety — Hand powered cranes

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13204:2004+A1:2012

Double acting hydraulic rescue tools for fire and rescue service use — Safety and performance requirements

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 13208:2003+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Vegetable peelers — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13218:2002+A1:2008

Machine tools — Safety — Stationary grinding machines

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 13218:2002+A1:2008/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13241-1:2003+A1:2011

Industrial, commercial and garage doors and gates — Product standard — Part 1: Products without fire resistance or smoke control characteristics

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 13288:2005+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Bowl lifting and tilting machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13289:2001+A1:2013

Pasta processing plants — Dryers and coolers — Safety and hygiene requirements

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 13355:2004+A1:2009

Coating plants — Combined booths — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13367:2005+A1:2008

Ceramic machines — Safety — Transfer platforms and cars

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 13367:2005+A1:2008/AC:2009

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13378:2001+A1:2013

Pasta processing plants — Pasta presses — Safety and hygiene requirements

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 13379:2001+A1:2013

Pasta processing plants — Spreader, stripping and cutting machine, stick return conveyor, stick magazine — Safety and hygiene requirements

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 13389:2005+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Mixers with horizontal shafts — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13390:2002+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Pie and tart machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-1:2002+A1:2008

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 1: Thimbles for steel wire rope slings

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-2:2001+A1:2008

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 2: Splicing of eyes for wire rope slings

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-3:2004+A1:2008

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 3: Ferrules and ferrule-securing

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-4:2011

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 4: Metal and resin socketing

20.7.2011

EN 13411-4:2002+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.9.2011)

CEN

EN 13411-5:2003+A1:2008

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 5: U-bolt wire rope grips

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-6:2004+A1:2008

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 6: Asymmetric wedge socket

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-7:2006+A1:2008

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 7: Symmetric wedge socket

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13411-8:2011

Terminations for steel wire ropes — Safety — Part 8: Swage terminals and swaging

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 13414-1:2003+A2:2008

Steel wire rope slings — Safety — Part 1: Slings for general lifting service

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13414-2:2003+A2:2008

Steel wire rope slings — Safety — Part 2: Specification for information for use and maintenance to be provided by the manufacturer

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13414-3:2003+A1:2008

Steel wire rope slings — Safety — Part 3: Grommets and cable-laid slings

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13418:2013

Plastics and rubber machines — Winding machines for film or sheet — Safety requirements

28.11.2013

EN 13418:2004+A1:2008

Date expired

(30.11.2013)

CEN

EN 13448:2001+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Inter-row mowing units — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13457:2004+A1:2010

Footwear, leather and imitation leather goods manufacturing machines — Splitting, skiving, cutting, cementing and cement drying machines — Safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 13482:2014

Robots and robotic devices — Safety requirements for personal care robots (ISO 13482:2014)

This is the first publication

 

 

CEN

EN 13524:2003+A2:2014

Highway maintenance machines — Safety requirements

This is the first publication

EN 13524:2003+A1:2009

31.8.2014

CEN

EN 13525:2005+A2:2009

Forestry machinery — Wood chippers — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13531:2001+A1:2008

Earth-moving machinery — Tip-over protection structure (TOPS) for compact excavators — Laboratory tests and performance requirements (ISO 12117:1997 modified)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13534:2006+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Curing injection machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13557:2003+A2:2008

Cranes — Controls and control stations

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13561:2004+A1:2008

External blinds — Performance requirements including safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13570:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Mixing machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13586:2004+A1:2008

Cranes — Access

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13591:2005+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Fixed deck oven loaders — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13617-1:2012

Petrol filling stations — Part 1: Safety requirements for construction and performance of metering pumps, dispensers and remote pumping units

24.8.2012

EN 13617-1:2004+A1:2009

Date expired

(30.11.2012)

CEN

EN 13621:2004+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Salad dryers — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13659:2004+A1:2008

Shutters — Performance requirements including safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13675:2004+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for tube forming and rolling mills and their finishing line equipment

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13683:2003+A2:2011

Garden equipment — Integrally powered shredders/chippers — Safety

20.7.2011

 

 

 

EN 13683:2003+A2:2011/AC:2013

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13684:2004+A3:2009

Garden equipment — Pedestrian controlled lawn aerators and scarifiers — Safety

26.5.2010

EN 13684:2004+A2:2009

Date expired

(30.6.2010)

CEN

EN 13731:2007

Lifting bag systems for fire and rescue service use — Safety and performance requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13732:2013

Food processing machinery — Bulk milk coolers on farms — Requirements for performance, safety and hygiene

28.11.2013

EN 13732:2002+A2:2009

Date expired

(31.1.2014)

CEN

EN 13736:2003+A1:2009

Safety of machine tools — Pneumatic presses

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13852-1:2013

Cranes — Offshore cranes — Part 1: General-purpose offshore cranes

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 13862:2001+A1:2009

Floor cutting-off machines — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13870:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Chop cutting machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13871:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Cubes cutting machinery — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13885:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Clipping machines — Safety and hygiene requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13886:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Cooking kettles equipped with powered stirrer and/or mixer — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13889:2003+A1:2008

Forged steel shackles for general lifting purposes — Dee shackles and bow shackles — Grade 6 — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 13898:2003+A1:2009

Machine tools — Safety — Sawing machines for cold metal

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 13898:2003+A1:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 13951:2012

Liquid pumps — Safety requirements — Agrifoodstuffs equipment; Design rules to ensure hygiene in use

24.8.2012

EN 13951:2003+A1:2008

Date expired

(31.10.2012)

CEN

EN 13954:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Bread slicers — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 13977:2011

Railway applications — Track — Safety requirements for portable machines and trolleys for construction and maintenance

20.7.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 13985:2003+A1:2009

Machine tools — Safety — Guillotine shears

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14010:2003+A1:2009

Safety of machinery — Equipment for power driven parking of motor vehicles — Safety and EMC requirements for design, manufacturing, erection and commissioning stages

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14017:2005+A2:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Solid fertilizer distributors — Safety

18.12.2009

EN 14017:2005+A1:2008

Date expired

(31.1.2010)

CEN

EN 14018:2005+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Seed drills — Safety

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14033-3:2009+A1:2011

Railway applications — Track — Railbound construction and maintenance machines — Part 3: General safety requirements

29.2.2012

EN 14033-3:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2012)

CEN

EN 14043:2014

High rise aerial appliances for fire and rescue service use — Turntable ladders with combined movements — Safety and performance requirements and test methods

This is the first publication

EN 14043:2005+A1:2009

31.7.2014

CEN

EN 14044:2014

High rise aerial appliances for fire and rescue service use — Turntable ladders with sequential movements — Safety and performance requirements and test methods

This is the first publication

EN 14044:2005+A1:2009

31.7.2014

CEN

EN 14070:2003+A1:2009

Safety of machine tools — Transfer and special-purpose machines

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN 14070:2003+A1:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 14238:2004+A1:2009

Cranes — Manually controlled load manipulating devices

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 14314:2009

Reciprocal internal combustion engines — Recoil starting equipment — General safety requirements (ISO 14314:2004)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14439:2006+A2:2009

Cranes — Safety — Tower cranes

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14462:2005+A1:2009

Surface treatment equipment — Noise test code for surface treatment equipment including its ancillary handling equipment — Accuracy grades 2 and 3

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14466:2005+A1:2008

Fire-fighting pumps — Portable pumps — Safety and performance requirements, tests

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14492-1:2006+A1:2009

Cranes — Power driven winches and hoists — Part 1: Power driven winches

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 14492-1:2006+A1:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 14492-2:2006+A1:2009

Cranes — Power driven winches and hoists — Part 2: Power driven hoists

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 14492-2:2006+A1:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 14502-2:2005+A1:2008

Cranes — Equipment for the lifting of persons — Part 2: Elevating control stations

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14655:2005+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Baguette slicers — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 14656:2006+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for extrusion presses for steel and non-ferrous metals

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 14658:2005+A1:2010

Continuous handling equipment and systems — General safety requirements for continuous handling equipment for opencast lignite mining

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 14673:2006+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for hydraulically powered open die hot forging presses for the forging of steel and non-ferrous metals

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 14677:2008

Safety of machinery — Secondary steelmaking — Machinery and equipment for treatment of liquid steel

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14681:2006+A1:2010

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for machinery and equipment for production of steel by electric arc furnaces

20.10.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 14710-1:2005+A2:2008

Fire-fighting pumps — Fire-fighting centrifugal pumps without primer — Part 1: Classification, general and safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14710-2:2005+A2:2008

Fire-fighting pumps — Fire-fighting centrifugal pumps without primer — Part 2: Verification of general and safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14753:2007

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for machinery and equipment for continuous casting of steel

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14886:2008

Plastics and rubber machines — Bandknife cutting machines for block foams — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14910:2007+A1:2009

Garden equipment — Walk-behind combustion engine powered trimmers — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14930:2007+A1:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery and gardening equipment — Pedestrian controlled and hand-held machines — Determination of accessibility of hot surfaces

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14957:2006+A1:2010

Food processing machinery — Dishwashing machines with conveyor — Safety and hygiene requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 14958:2006+A1:2009

Food processing machinery — Machinery for grinding and processing flour and semolina — Safety and hygiene requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14973:2006+A1:2008

Conveyor belts for use in underground installations — Electrical and flammability safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 14982:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Electromagnetic compatibility — Test methods and acceptance criteria (ISO 14982:1998)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 14985:2012

Cranes — Slewing jib cranes

23.3.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 15000:2008

Safety of industrial trucks — Self propelled variable reach trucks — Specification, performance and test requirements for longitudinal load moment indicators and longitudinal load moment limiters

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15011:2011+A1:2014

Cranes — Bridge and gantry cranes

This is the first publication

EN 15011:2011

31.8.2014

CEN

EN 15027:2007+A1:2009

Transportable wall saw and wire saw equipment for job site — Safety

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15056:2006+A1:2009

Cranes — Requirements for container handling spreaders

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15059:2009

Snow grooming equipment — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15061:2007+A1:2008

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for strip processing line machinery and equipment

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15067:2007

Plastics and rubber machines — Film converting machines for bags and sacks — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15093:2008

Safety of Machinery — Safety requirements for hot flat rolling mills

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15094:2008

Safety of Machinery — Safety requirements for cold flat rolling mills

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15095:2007+A1:2008

Power-operated mobile racking and shelving, carousels and storage lifts — Safety requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15162:2008

Machines and plants for mining and tooling of natural stone — Safety requirements for gang saws

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15163:2008

Machines and installations for the exploitation and processing of natural stone — Safety — Requirements for diamond wire saws

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15164:2008

Machines and plants for mining and tooling of natural stone — Safety — Requirements for chain- and belt-slotting machines

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15166:2008

Food processing machinery — Automatic back splitting machines of butchery carcasses — Safety and hygiene requirements

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15268:2008

Petrol filling stations — Safety requirements for the construction of submersible pump assemblies

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15503:2009+A1:2013

Garden equipment — Garden blowers, vacuums and blower/vacuums — Safety

11.4.2014

EN 15503:2009

Date expired

(30.4.2014)

CEN

EN 15695-1:2009

Agricultural tractors and self-propelled sprayers — Protection of the operator (driver) against hazardous substances — Part 1: Cab classification, requirements and test procedures

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN 15695-2:2009

Agricultural tractors and self-propelled sprayers — Protection of the operator (driver) against hazardous substances — Part 2: Filters, requirements and test procedures

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 15695-2:2009/AC:2011

 

 

 

CEN

EN 15700:2011

Safety for conveyor belts for winter sport or leisure use

29.2.2012

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 15744:2008

Hand-held non-electric power tools — Noise measurement code — Engineering method (grade 2) (ISO 15744:2002)

8.9.2009

 

 

CEN

EN 15746-2:2010+A1:2011

Railway applications — Track — Road-rail machines and associated equipment — Part 2: General safety requirements

29.2.2012

EN 15746-2:2010

Date expired

(30.4.2012)

CEN

EN 15774:2010

Food processing machinery — Machines for processing fresh and filled pasta (tagliatelle, cannelloni, ravioli, tortellini, orecchiette and gnocchi) — Safety and hygiene requirements

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 15811:2009

Agricultural machinery — Guards for moving parts of power transmission — Guard opening with tool (ISO/TS 28923:2007 modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 15811:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN 15830:2012

Rough-terrain variable reach trucks — Visibility — Test methods and verification

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 15861:2012

Food processing machinery — Smokehouses — Safety and hygiene requirements

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 15895:2011

Cartridge operated hand-held tools — Safety requirements — Fixing and hard marking tools

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN 15949:2012

Safety of machinery — Safety requirements for bar mills, structural steel mills and wire rod mills

5.6.2012

 

 

CEN

EN 15954-2:2013

Railway applications — Track — Trailers and associated equipment — Part 2: General safety requirements

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 15955-2:2013

Railway applications — Track — Demountable machines and associated equipment — Part 2: General safety requirements

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 15997:2011

All terrain vehicles (ATVs — Quads) — Safety requirements and test methods

29.2.2012

 

 

 

EN 15997:2011/AC:2012

 

 

 

CEN

EN 16005:2012

Power operated pedestrian doorsets — Safety in use — Requirements and test methods

5.4.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 16029:2012

Ride-on, motorized vehicles intended for the transportation of persons and not intended for use on public roads — Single-track two-wheel motor vehicles — Safety requirements and test methods

24.8.2012

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 16119-1:2013

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Environmental requirements for sprayers — Part 1: General (ISO 16119-1:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 16119-2:2013

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Environmental requirements for sprayers — Part 2: Horizontal boom sprayers (ISO 16119-2:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 16119-3:2013

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Environmental requirements for sprayers — Part 3: Sprayers for bush and tree crops (ISO 16119-3:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 16230-1:2013

Leisure karts — Part 1: Safety requirements and test methods for karts

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 16231-1:2013

Self-propelled agricultural machinery — Assessment of stability — Part 1: Principles (ISO 16231-1:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 16246:2012

Agricultural machinery — Backhoes — Safety

5.4.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 16252:2012

Machines for compacting waste materials or recyclable fractions — Horizontal baling presses — Safety requirements

5.4.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 16307-1:2013

Industrial trucks — Safety requirements and verification — Part 1: Supplementary requirements for self-propelled industrial trucks, other than driverless trucks, variable-reach trucks and burden-carrier trucks

5.4.2013

 

 

CEN

EN 16307-5:2013

Industrial trucks — Safety requirements and verification — Part 5: Supplementary requirements for pedestrian-propelled trucks

This is the first publication

 

 

CEN

EN 16307-6:2014

Industrial trucks — Safety requirements and verification — Part 6: Supplementary requirements for burden and personnel carriers

This is the first publication

 

 

CEN

EN 16327:2014

Fire-fighting — Positive-pressure proportioning systems (PPPS) and compressed-air foam systems (CAFS)

This is the first publication

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 19432:2012

Building construction machinery and equipment — Portable, hand-held, internal combustion engine driven cut-off machines — Safety requirements (ISO 19432:2012)

15.11.2012

EN ISO 19432:2008

Date expired

(31.1.2013)

CEN

EN ISO 19932-1:2013

Equipment for crop protection — Knapsack sprayers — Part 1: Safety and environmental requirements (ISO 19932-1:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 19932-2:2013

Equipment for crop protection — Knapsack sprayers — Part 2: Test methods (ISO 19932-2:2013)

28.11.2013

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 20361:2009

Liquid pumps and pump units — Noise test code — Grades 2 and 3 of accuracy (ISO 20361:2007)

8.9.2009

 

 

 

EN ISO 20361:2009/AC:2010

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 22867:2011

Forestry and gardening machinery — Vibration test code for portable hand-held machines with internal combustion engine — Vibration at the handles (ISO 22867:2011)

29.2.2012

EN ISO 22867:2008

Date expired

(30.6.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 22868:2011

Forestry and gardening machinery — Noise test code for portable hand-held machines with internal combustion engine — Engineering method (Grade 2 accuracy) (ISO 22868:2011)

20.7.2011

EN ISO 22868:2008

Date expired

(30.9.2011)

CEN

EN ISO 23125:2010

Machine tools — Safety — Turning machines (ISO 23125:2010)

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN ISO 23125:2010/A1:2012

24.8.2012

 

Date expired

(31.10.2012)

CEN

EN ISO 28139:2009

Agricultural and forestry machinery — Knapsack combustion-engine-driven mistblowers — Safety requirements (ISO 28139:2009)

18.12.2009

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28881:2013

Machine tools — Safety — Electro-discharge machines (ISO 28881:2013)

28.11.2013

EN 12957:2001+A1:2009

Date expired

(28.2.2014)

 

EN ISO 28881:2013/AC:2013

 

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-1:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 1: Angle and vertical grinders (ISO 28927-1:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-2:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 2: Wrenches, nutrunners and screwdrivers (ISO 28927-2:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-3:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 3: Polishers and rotary, orbital and random orbital sanders (ISO 28927-3:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-4:2010

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 4: Straight grinders (ISO 28927-4:2010)

8.4.2011

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-5:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 5: Drills and impact drills (ISO 28927-5:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-6:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 6: Rammers (ISO 28927-6:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-7:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 7: Nibblers and shears (ISO 28927-7:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-8:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 8: Saws, polishing and filing machines with reciprocating action and saws with oscillating or rotating action (ISO 28927-8:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-9:2009

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 9: Scaling hammers and needle scalers (ISO 28927-9:2009)

26.5.2010

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-10:2011

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 10: Percussive drills, hammers and breakers (ISO 28927-10:2011)

18.11.2011

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-11:2011

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 11: Stone hammers (ISO 28927-11:2011)

20.7.2011

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 28927-12:2012

Hand-held portable power tools — Test methods for evaluation of vibration emission — Part 12: Die grinders (ISO 28927-12:2012)

5.4.2013

 

 

Standards developed by CENELEC

Standards developed by CENELEC are not classified as A, B or C-type standards in this list.

Cenelec

EN 50223:2010

Stationary electrostatic application equipment for ignitable flock material — Safety requirements

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 50348:2010

Stationary electrostatic application equipment for non-ignitable liquid coating material — Safety requirements

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 50348:2010/AC:2010

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 50569:2013

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Particular requirements for commercial electric spin extractors

11.4.2014

 

 

Cenelec

EN 50570:2013

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Particular requirements for commercial electric tumble dryers

11.4.2014

 

 

Cenelec

EN 50571:2013

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Particular requirements for commercial electric washing machines

11.4.2014

 

 

Cenelec

EN 50580:2012

Safety of hand-held electric motor operated tools — Particular requirements for spray guns

5.6.2012

 

 

 

EN 50580:2012/A1:2013

28.11.2013

 

22.7.2016

Cenelec

EN 60204-1:2006

Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines — Part 1: General requirements

IEC 60204-1:2005 (Modified)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 60204-1:2006/A1:2009

IEC 60204-1:2005/A1:2008

26.5.2010

 

Date expired

(1.2.2012)

 

EN 60204-1:2006/AC:2010

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60204-11:2000

Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines — Part 11: Requirements for HV equipment for voltages above 1  000 V a.c. or 1  500 V d.c. and not exceeding 36 kV

IEC 60204-11:2000

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 60204-11:2000/AC:2010

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60204-31:2013

Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines — Part 31: Particular safety and EMC requirements for sewing machines, units and systems

IEC 60204-31:2013

11.4.2014

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60204-32:2008

Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines — Part 32: Requirements for hoisting machines

IEC 60204-32:2008

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60204-33:2011

Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines — Part 33: Requirements for semiconductor fabrication equipment

IEC 60204-33:2009 (Modified)

18.11.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-1:2012

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 1: General requirements

IEC 60335-1:2010 (Modified)

5.6.2012

EN 60335-1:2002

and its amendments

21.11.2014

 

EN 60335-1:2012/AC:2014

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-36:2002

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-36: Particular requirements for commercial electric cooking ranges, ovens, hobs and hob elements

IEC 60335-2-36:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-36:2002/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

 

EN 60335-2-36:2002/AC:2007

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-37:2002

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-37: Particular requirements for commercial electric deep fat fryers

IEC 60335-2-37:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-37:2002/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

 

EN 60335-2-37:2002/AC:2007

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-40:2003

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-40: Particular requirements for electrical heat pumps, air-conditioners and dehumidifiers

IEC 60335-2-40:2002 (Modified)

28.11.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/A11:2004

28.11.2013

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/A12:2005

28.11.2013

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/A1:2006

IEC 60335-2-40:2002/A1:2005 (Modified)

28.11.2013

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/A2:2009

IEC 60335-2-40:2002/A2:2005 (Modified)

28.11.2013

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/A13:2012

28.11.2013

 

11.7.2014

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/AC:2010

 

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/AC:2006

 

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-40:2003/A13:2012/AC:2013

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-42:2003

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-42: Particular requirements for commercial electric forced convection ovens, steam cookers and steam-convection ovens

IEC 60335-2-42:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-42:2003/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

 

EN 60335-2-42:2003/AC:2007

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-47:2003

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-47: Particular requirements for commercial electric boiling pans

IEC 60335-2-47:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-47:2003/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

 

EN 60335-2-47:2003/AC:2007

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-48:2003

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-48: Particular requirements for commercial electric grillers and toasters

IEC 60335-2-48:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-48:2003/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

 

EN 60335-2-48:2003/AC:2007

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-49:2003

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-49: Particular requirements for commercial electric appliances for keeping food and crockery warm

IEC 60335-2-49:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-49:2003/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

 

EN 60335-2-49:2003/AC:2007

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-65:2003

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-65: Particular requirements for air-cleaning appliances

IEC 60335-2-65:2002

5.4.2013

 

 

 

EN 60335-2-65:2003/A11:2012

5.4.2013

 

21.12.2014

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-67:2009

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-67: Particular requirements for floor treatment and floor cleaning machines for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-67:2002 (Modified) + A1:2005 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-67:2012

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-67: Particular requirements for floor treatment machines for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-67:2012 (Modified)

15.11.2012

EN 60335-2-67:2009

3.5.2015

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-68:2009

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-68: Particular requirements for spray extraction machines for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-68:2002 (Modified) + A1:2005 (Modified) + A2:2007 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-68:2012

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-68: Particular requirements for spray extraction machines, for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-68:2012 (Modified)

15.11.2012

EN 60335-2-68:2009

3.5.2015

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-69:2009

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-69: Particular requirements for wet and dry vacuum cleaners, including power brush, for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-69:2002 (Modified) + A1:2004 (Modified) + A2:2007 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-69:2012

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-69: Particular requirements for wet and dry vacuum cleaners, including power brush for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-69:2012 (Modified)

15.11.2012

EN 60335-2-69:2009

28.3.2015

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-72:2009

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-72: Particular requirements for automatic machines for floor treatment for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-72:2002 (Modified) + A1:2005 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-72:2012

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-72: Particular requirements for floor treatment machines with or without traction drive, for commercial use

IEC 60335-2-72:2012 (Modified)

15.11.2012

EN 60335-2-72:2009

3.5.2015

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-77:2010

Safety of household and similar appliances — Part 2-77: Particular requirements for pedestrian-controlled walk-behind electrically powered lawn mowers

IEC 60335-2-77:2002 (Modified)

8.4.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-79:2009

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-79: Particular requirements for high pressure cleaners and steam cleaners

IEC 60335-2-79:2002 (Modified) + A1:2004 (Modified) + A2:2007 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60335-2-79:2012

Household and similar electrical appliances — Safety — Part 2-79: Particular requirements for high pressure cleaners and steam cleaners

IEC 60335-2-79:2012 (Modified)

15.11.2012

EN 60335-2-79:2009

3.4.2015

Cenelec

EN 60745-1:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 1: General requirements

IEC 60745-1:2006 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 60745-1:2009/A11:2010

8.4.2011

 

Date expired

(1.10.2013)

 

EN 60745-1:2009/AC:2009

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-1:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-1: Particular requirements for drills and impact drills

IEC 60745-2-1:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-2:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-2: Particular requirements for screwdrivers and impact wrenches

IEC 60745-2-2:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-3:2011

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-3: Particular requirements for grinders, polishers and disk-type sanders

IEC 60745-2-3:2006 (Modified) + A1:2010 (Modified)

18.11.2011

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-3:2011/A2:2013

IEC 60745-2-3:2006/A2:2012 (Modified)

28.11.2013

 

25.2.2016

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-4:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-4: Particular requirements for sanders and polishers other than disk type

IEC 60745-2-4:2002 (Modified) + A1:2008 (Modified)

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-4:2009/A11:2011

29.2.2012

 

14.11.2014

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-5:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-5: Particular requirements for circular saws

IEC 60745-2-5:2010 (Modified)

8.4.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-6:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-6: Particular requirements for hammers

IEC 60745-2-6:2003 (Modified) + A1:2006 + A2:2008

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-8:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-8: Particular requirements for shears and nibblers

IEC 60745-2-8:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-9:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-9: Particular requirements for tappers

IEC 60745-2-9:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-11:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-11: Particular requirements for reciprocating saws (jig and sabre saws)

IEC 60745-2-11:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-12:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-12: Particular requirements for concrete vibrators

IEC 60745-2-12:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-13:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-13: Particular requirements for chain saws

IEC 60745-2-13:2006 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-13:2009/A1:2010

IEC 60745-2-13:2006/A1:2009

20.7.2011

 

Date expired

(1.12.2013)

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-14:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-14: Particular requirements for planers

IEC 60745-2-14:2003 (Modified) + A1:2006 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-14:2009/A2:2010

IEC 60745-2-14:2003/A2:2010

8.4.2011

 

Date expired

(1.6.2013)

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-15:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-15: Particular requirements for hedge trimmers

IEC 60745-2-15:2006 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-15:2009/A1:2010

IEC 60745-2-15:2006/A1:2009

28.11.2013

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-16:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-16: Particular requirements for tackers

IEC 60745-2-16:2008 (Modified)

8.4.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-17:2010

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-17: Particular requirements for routers and trimmers

IEC 60745-2-17:2010 (Modified)

8.4.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-18:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-18: Particular requirements for strapping tools

IEC 60745-2-18:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-19:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-19: Particular requirements for jointers

IEC 60745-2-19:2005 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-19:2009/A1:2010

IEC 60745-2-19:2005/A1:2010

8.4.2011

 

Date expired

(1.6.2013)

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-20:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-20: Particular requirements for band saws

IEC 60745-2-20:2003 (Modified) + A1:2008

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-21:2009

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-21: Particular requirements for drain cleaners

IEC 60745-2-21:2002 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-21:2009/A1:2010

IEC 60745-2-21:2002/A1:2008

20.7.2011

 

Date expired

(1.12.2013)

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-22:2011

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-22: Particular requirements for cut-off machines

IEC 60745-2-22:2011 (Modified)

18.11.2011

 

 

 

EN 60745-2-22:2011/A11:2013

28.11.2013

 

17.12.2015

Cenelec

EN 60745-2-23:2013

Hand-held motor-operated electric tools — Safety — Part 2-23: Particular requirements for die grinders and small rotary tools

IEC 60745-2-23:2012 (Modified)

28.11.2013

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60947-5-3:2013

Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 5-3: Control circuit devices and switching elements — Requirements for proximity devices with defined behaviour under fault conditions (PDDB)

IEC 60947-5-3:2013

11.4.2014

 

 

Cenelec

EN 60947-5-5:1997

Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 5-5: Control circuit devices and switching elements — Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function

IEC 60947-5-5:1997

28.11.2013

 

 

 

EN 60947-5-5:1997/A1:2005

IEC 60947-5-5:1997/A1:2005

28.11.2013

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 60947-5-5:1997/A11:2013

28.11.2013

 

3.12.2015

Cenelec

EN 61029-1:2009

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 1: General requirements

IEC 61029-1:1990 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

 

EN 61029-1:2009/A11:2010

8.4.2011

 

Date expired

(28.11.2013)

 

EN 61029-1:2009/AC:2009

 

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-1:2010

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-1: Particular requirements for circular saw benches

IEC 61029-2-1:1993 (Modified) + A1:1999 + A2:2001

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-1:2012

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-1: Particular requirements for circular saw benches

IEC 61029-2-1:1993 (Modified) + A1:1999 + A2:2001

5.4.2013

EN 61029-2-1:2010

3.9.2015

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-3:2011

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-3: Particular requirements for planers and thicknessers

IEC 61029-2-3:1993 (Modified) + A1:2001

18.11.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-4:2011

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-4: Particular requirements for bench grinders

IEC 61029-2-4:1993 (Modified) + A1:2001 (Modified)

18.11.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-6:2010

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-6: Particular requirements for diamond drills with water supply

IEC 61029-2-6:1993 (Modified)

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-8:2010

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-8: Particular requirements for single spindle vertical moulders

IEC 61029-2-8:1995 (Modified) + A1:1999 + A2:2001

20.10.2010

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-9:2009

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-9: Particular requirements for mitre saws

IEC 61029-2-9:1995 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-9:2012

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-9: Particular requirements for mitre saws

IEC 61029-2-9:1995 (Modified)

5.4.2013

EN 61029-2-9:2009

3.9.2015

 

EN 61029-2-9:2012/A11:2013

28.11.2013

 

12.8.2016

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-10:2010

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-10: Particular requirements for cutting-off grinders

IEC 61029-2-10:1998 (Modified)

20.10.2010

 

 

 

EN 61029-2-10:2010/A11:2013

28.11.2013

 

22.7.2016

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-11:2009

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-11: Particular requirements for combined mitre and bench saws

IEC 61029-2-11:2001 (Modified)

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-11:2012

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-11: Particular requirements for combined mitre and bench saws

IEC 61029-2-11:2001 (Modified)

5.4.2013

EN 61029-2-11:2009

3.9.2015

 

EN 61029-2-11:2012/A11:2013

28.11.2013

 

12.8.2016

Cenelec

EN 61029-2-12:2011

Safety of transportable motor-operated electric tools — Part 2-12: Particular requirements for threading machines

IEC 61029-2-12:2010 (Modified)

18.11.2011

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61310-1:2008

Safety of machinery — Indication, marking and actuation — Part 1: Requirements for visual, acoustic and tactile signals

IEC 61310-1:2007

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61310-2:2008

Safety of machinery — Indication, marking and actuation — Part 2: Requirements for marking

IEC 61310-2:2007

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61310-3:2008

Safety of machinery — Indication, marking and actuation — Part 3: Requirements for the location and operation of actuators

IEC 61310-3:2007

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 61496-1:2013

Safety of machinery — Electro-sensitive protective equipment — Part 1: General requirements and tests

IEC 61496-1:2012

11.4.2014

EN 61496-1:2004

and its amendments

10.5.2015

Cenelec

EN 61800-5-2:2007

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems — Part 5-2: Safety requirements — Functional

IEC 61800-5-2:2007

18.12.2009

 

 

Cenelec

EN 62061:2005

Safety of machinery — Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems

IEC 62061:2005

26.5.2010

 

 

 

EN 62061:2005/A1:2013

IEC 62061:2005/A1:2012

28.11.2013

 

18.12.2015

 

EN 62061:2005/AC:2010

 

 

 

 


11.7.2014   

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

C 220/77


Commission communication in the framework of the implementation of the Directive 2001/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 3 December 2001 on general product safety

(Publication of titles and references of European standards under the directive)

(Text with EEA relevance)

2014/C 220/02

ESO

Reference and title of the harmonised standard

(and reference document)

Reference of superseded standard

Date of cessation of presumption of conformity of superseded standard

CEN

EN 581-1:2006

Outdoor furniture — Seating and tables for camping, domestic and contract use — Part 1: General safety requirements

 

 

CEN

EN 913:2008

Gymnastic equipment — General safety requirements and test methods

EN 913:1996

Date expired

(31.5.2009)

CEN

EN 914:2008

Gymnastic equipment — Parallel bars and combination asymmetric/parallel bars — Requirements and test methods including safety

 

 

CEN

EN 915:2008

Gymnastic equipment — Asymmetric bars — Requirements and test methods including safety

 

 

CEN

EN 916:2003

Gymnastic equipment — Vaulting boxes — Requirements and test methods including safety

 

 

CEN

EN 957-2:2003

Stationary training equipment — Part 2: Strength training equipment, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 957-4:2006+A1:2010

Stationary training equipment — Part 4: Strength training benches, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

EN 957-4:2006

Date expired

(31.10.2010)

CEN

EN 957-5:2009

Stationary training equipment — Part 5: Stationary exercise bicycles and upper body crank training equipment, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

EN 957-5:1996

Date expired

(31.8.2009)

CEN

EN 957-6:2010

Stationary training equipment — Part 6: Treadmills, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

EN 957-6:2001

Date expired

(30.6.2011)

CEN

EN 957-7:1998

Stationary training equipment — Part 7: Rowing machines, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 957-8:1998

Stationary training equipment — Part 8: Steppers, stairclimbers and climbers — Additional specific safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 957-9:2003

Stationary training equipment — Part 9: Elliptical trainers, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 957-10:2005

Stationary training equipment — Part 10: Exercise bicycles with a fixed wheel or without freewheel, additional specific safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 1129-1:1995

Furniture — Foldaway beds — Safety requirements and testing — Part 1: Safety requirements

 

 

CEN

EN 1129-2:1995

Furniture — Foldaway beds — Safety requirements and testing — Part 2: Test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 1130-1:1996

Furniture — Cribs and cradles for domestic use — Part 1: Safety requirements

 

 

CEN

EN 1130-2:1996

Furniture — Cribs and cradles for domestic use — Part 2: Test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 1273:2005

Child use and care articles — Baby walking frames — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 1400-1:2002

Child use and care articles — Soothers for babies and young children — Part 1: General safety requirements and product information

 

 

CEN

EN 1400-2:2002

Child use and care articles — Soothers for babies and young children — Part 2: Mechanical requirements and tests

 

 

CEN

EN 1400-3:2002

Child use and care articles — Soothers for babies and young children — Part 3: Chemical requirements and tests

 

 

CEN

EN 1466:2004

Child care articles — Carry cots and stands — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 1651:1999

Paragliding equipment — Harnesses — Safety requirements and strength tests

 

 

CEN

EN 1860-1:2003

Appliances, solid fuels and firelighters for barbecueing — Part 1: Barbecues burning solid fuels — Requirements and test methods

 

 

 

EN 1860-1:2003/A1:2006

 

Date expired

(31.8.2006)

CEN

EN ISO 9994:2006

Lighters — Safety specification (ISO 9994:2005)

EN ISO 9994:2002

Date expired

(30.9.2006)

CEN

EN 12196:2003

Gymnastic equipment — Horses and bucks — Functional and safety requirements, test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 12197:1997

Gymnastic equipment — Horizontal bars — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 12346:1998

Gymnastic equipment — Wall bars, lattice ladders and climbing frames — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 12432:1998

Gymnastic equipment — Balancing beams — Functional and safety requirements, test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 12491:2001

Paragliding equipment — Emergency parachutes — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 12586:1999

Child care articles — Soother holder — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

 

EN 12586:1999/AC:2002

 

 

CEN

EN 12655:1998

Gymnastic equipment — Hanging rings — Functional and safety requirements, test methods

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 12863:2010

Standard test method for assessing the ignition propensity of cigarettes (ISO 12863:2010)

 

 

CEN

EN 13138-2:2002

Buoyant aids for swimming instruction — Part 2: Safety requirements and test methods for buoyant aids to be held

 

 

CEN

EN 13209-1:2004

Child use and care articles — Baby carriers — Safety requirements and test methods — Part 1: Framed back carriers

 

 

CEN

EN 13319:2000

Diving accessories — Depth gauges and combined depth and time measuring devices — Functional and safety requirements, test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 13899:2003

Roller sports equipment — Roller skates — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 14059:2002

Decorative oil lamps — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 14344:2004

Child use and care articles — Child seats for cycles — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 14350-1:2004

Child use and care articles — Drinking equipment — Part 1: General and mechanical requirements and tests

 

 

CEN

EN 14682:2007

Safety of children's clothing — Cords and drawstrings on children's clothing — Specifications

EN 14682:2004

Date expired

(30.6.2008)

CEN

EN 14764:2005

City and trekking bicycles — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 14766:2005

Mountain-bicycles — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 14781:2005

Racing bicycles — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN 14872:2006

Bicycles — Accessories for bicycles — Luggage carriers

 

 

CEN

EN 15649-1:2009+A2:2013

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 1: Classification, materials, general requirements and test methods

EN 15649-1:2009+A1:2012

Date expired

(30.6.2014)

CEN

EN 15649-2:2009+A1:2012

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 2: Consumer information

EN 15649-2:2009

 

CEN

EN 15649-3:2009+A1:2012

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 3: Additional specific safety requirements and test methods for Class A devices

EN 15649-3:2009

 

CEN

EN 15649-4:2010+A1:2012

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 4: Additional specific safety requirements and test methods for Class B devices

EN 15649-4:2010

 

CEN

EN 15649-5:2009

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 5: Additional specific safety requirements and test methods for Class C devices

 

 

CEN

EN 15649-6:2009+A1:2013

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 6: Additional specific safety requirements and test methods for Class D devices

EN 15649-6:2009

Date expired

(30.6.2014)

CEN

EN 15649-7:2009

Floating leisure articles for use on and in the water — Part 7: Additional specific safety requirements and test methods for class E devices

 

 

CEN

EN 16156:2010

Cigarettes — Assessment of the ignition propensity — Safety requirement

 

 

CEN

EN 16281:2013

Child protective products — Consumer fitted child resistant locking devices for windows and balcony doors — Safety requirements and test methods

 

 

CEN

EN ISO 20957-1:2013

Stationary training equipment — Part 1: General safety requirements and test methods (ISO 20957-1:2013)

EN 957-1:2005

Date expired

(31.3.2014)

Cenelec

EN 60065:2002

Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus — Safety requirements

IEC 60065:2001 (Modified)

 

 

 

EN 60065:2002/A12:2011

 

Date expired

(24.1.2013)

According to the Commission Implementing Decision 2012/29/EU of 13 January 2012 (OJ L 13, 17.1.2012, p. 7) the reference of standard EN 60065:2002/A12:2011 concerning protection against excessive sound pressure from personal music players shall be published.

Cenelec

EN 60950-1:2006

Information technology equipment — Safety — Part 1: General requirements

IEC 60950-1:2005 (Modified)

 

 

 

EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011

 

Date expired

(24.1.2013)

According to the Commission Implementing Decision 2012/29/EU of 13 January 2012 (OJ L 13, 17.1.2012, p. 7) the reference of standard EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011 concerning protection against excessive sound pressure from personal music players shall be published.

 

English

New ATEX 2014/34/UE directive - consequences for manufacturers

The new ATEX Directive: impact and consequences for manufacturers

The new ATEX 2014/34/UE does not introduce significant changes for the ATEX manufacturers. Changes between the requirements of Directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX Directive 2014/34/UE are defined in Annex XII of Directive 2014/34/UE.

Changes to the Directive 2014/34/UE mainly concern:

  1. Definition in Article 2, the different economic actors (12.) "Manufacturer" (13). "Agent (14)." Importer "(15.) 'Distributor' (16)." Economic operators " in relation to the placing on the market of ATEX products (10).
  2. How to notify notified bodies and the requirements that apply to member states (Articles 17 to 33).
  3. Market surveillance (Articles 34-38) in application of Regulation (EC) No 765/2008.

In the correlation table in Annex XII between Directive 94/9/EC and Directive 2014/34/UE, you may notice that:

  • Many articles have been added to clarify certain aspects
  • Some items were completed,
  • Other items change numbering
  • Some items were deleted (Article 5, paragraph 1, first paragraph, Article 12, paragraph 1, Article 6, paragraphs 1 and 2, Article 7, Article 8, paragraph 7, Article 9, Article 10, paragraph 1, Article 10, paragraph 3, Article 11, Articles 12 and 13, Article 14, paragraph 1 and paragraph 3, Article 15, paragraph 2).
  • Annexes I to IX were fully retained with minor modifications
    • So there is no change of the Essential Requirements of Health and Safety as defined in Annex II.
    • There is also no change in the various evaluation procedures.
    • The terms of Annex III of the Directive, however, are modified. The notified body (NB) will not issue an EC type examination certificate but a EU-type examination certificate. The result of this change is that in case of major normative change in the harmonized standards that impacts the already certified products, the Notified Body will no longer issue an addition to an EC type examination certificate. A new EU-type examination certificate will be issued and will require changing of the documentation.
  • Annexes X and XI were removed and three annexes were added (Annex X, XI, XII)
    • Annex X: EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY - the manufacturer will issue a EU declaration of conformity. A definition is also given in Article 14 EU Declaration of Conformity
    • Annex XI: PART A: Repealed Directive with list of its successive amendments
    • Annex XII: Correlation table between the ATEX directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX Directive 2014/34/UE

Impacts for manufacturers are defined in Article 6: Obligations of manufacturers

The main points and impacts of this new directive for manufacturers are:

  1. The CE marking is not changed
  2. If changes in the harmonized standards do not impose major modifiactions, then the manufacturer may refer to the official documents he has obtained from a notified body under the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
  3. The manufacturer shall make reference to Directive 2014/34/UE in the instructions and Declaration of conformity instead of the reference to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
  4. The manufacturer shall write a EU declaration of conformity instead of the current EC declaration of conformity.

 


Concerning the CE marking, the new Directive is more precise and defines:

Article 2 (26)        ‘CE marking’ means a marking by which the manufacturer indicates that the product is in conformity with the applicable requirements set out in Union harmonisation legislation providing for its affixing.

  • For already certified and for which there is no major change in the harmonized product standards, the manufacturer may continue to use the EC type examination and the notification of the Quality Assurance System Certification, obtained in accordance with Directive 94/9/EC.
  • The CE marking is affixed to products is meanwhile not changed to the new Directive imposing (Whereas (25)  The CE marking, indicating the conformity of a product, is the visible consequence of a whole process comprising conformity assessment in a broad sense. General principles governing the CE marking are set out in Regulation (EC) No 765/2008. Rules governing the affixing of the CE marking should be laid down in this Directive. 

Other sections specify the rules and conditions for affixing the CE marking, including

  • Article 15: General principles of the CE marking,
  • Article 16: Rules and conditions for affixing the CE marking and other markings

Article 41 : Transitional provisions

1.   Member States shall not impede the making available on the market or the putting into service of products covered by Directive 94/9/EC which are in conformity with that Directive and which were placed on the market before 20 April 2016.

2.   Certificates issued under Directive 94/9/EC shall be valid under this Directive.

Article 42 : Transposition

1.   Member States shall adopt and publish by 19 April 2016 the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with Article 1, points 2 and 8 to 26 of Article 2, Article 3, Articles 5 to 41 and Annexes III to X. They shall forthwith communicate the text of those measures to the Commission.

They shall apply those measures from 20 April 2016.

(...)

Article 44: Entry into force and application

This Directive shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.

Points 1 and 3 to 7 of Article 2, Article 4 and Annexes I, II, XI and XII shall apply from 20 April 2016.

Note: The Directives eg 2014/34/EC apply to Member States and not to the manufacturers. Member States must transpose the directive into their internal regulation. They must do it at least not later than 19 April 2016.

Because this Directive is concerning the placing on the market of products, the full text of the Directive will be transposed in the various national laws without any change. So manufacturers have until April 20, 2016 to prepare.

Member States must incorporate the Directive into their national legislation from the entry into force of the Directive eg April 25, 2014 (March 29, 2014 + 20 days).

Hereafter the amended articles of ATEX Directive 94/9/EC and new items added by the ATEX Directive 2014/34/UE:

Article of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC

New Article of the ATEX Directive 2014/34/UE

Article 1, paragraph 1

Article 1, paragraph 1 a)

Article 1, paragraph 2

Article 1, paragraph 1, point b)

Article 1, paragraph 3

Article 2, paragraphs 1) to 9)

Article 1, paragraph 4

Article 1, paragraph 2

Article 2

Article 3

Article 3

Article 4

Article 4

Article 5

Article 5, paragraph 1, second subparagraph

Article 12, paragraph 2

Article 5, paragraph 2

Article 5, paragraph 3

Article 6, paragraph 3

Article 39, paragraphs 1-4

Article 6, paragraph 4

Article 39, paragraph 5, second subparagraph

Article 8, paragraphs 1-6

Article 13, paragraphs 1-6

Article 10, paragraph 2

Article 16, paragraph 1

Article 14, paragraph 2

Article 41, paragraph 2

Article 15, paragraph 1

Article 42, paragraph 1

Article 16

Article 45

 

Articles added by ATEX 2014/34/UE

Article of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC

New section of the ATEX Directive 2014/34/UE

-

Article 1, paragraph 1, point C)

-

Article 2, point 10) 26)

-

Articles 6-11

-

Article 39, paragraph 5, first paragraph

-

Articles 14 and 15

-

Article 16, paragraphs 2-6

-

Articles 17 to 33, Articles 34 to 38 and Article 40

-

Article 41, paragraph 1

-

Article 42, paragraph 2

-

Articles 43 and 44

 
English

Annex 3 of ATEX 99/92/EC directive

ANNEX III

 

Warning sign for places where explosive atmospheres may occur, pursuant to Article 7(3):

Place where explosive atmospheres may occur

logo directive ATEX 99/92/EC

Distinctive features:

- triangular shape,

- black letters on a yellow background with black edging (the yellow part to take up at least 50 % of the area of the sign).

Member States may add other explanatory data if they wish.

English

Pages

Subscribe to Machinery directive 2006/42/CE - Functional safety & ATEX directive 2014/34/EU RSS